Sei sulla pagina 1di 304

BenchMarl

Control Valve Diagnostics tm

User’s Guide
Version 5.0

Black Diamond
tm

E n g i n e e r i n g

14884 South Heritagecrest Way


Suite B
Bluffdale, Utah USA 84065

(801) 256 - 0202 ph


(801) 256 - 0217 fax
www.BenchMarkValveDiagnostics.com
License and Limited Warranty

Page

License Agreement and Limited Warranty II


Copyright Notice VI
License Agreement and
Limited Warranty

License Agreement and Limited Warranty


ATTENTION ! USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR DIAGNOSTICS TOOL IS AN
ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT. READ THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE USING
THE PRODUCT!

A. USE CONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT


READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITED
WARRANTY ( THIS "AGREEMENT" ) PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OR USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
HARDWARE, OR THE DIAGNOSTICS TOOL, WHICH IS COMPRISED OF BOTH SOFTWARE
AND HARDWARE COMPONENTS. THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE, AND/OR DIAGNOSTICS
TOOL ARE SOMETIMES REFERRED TO AS THE "PRODUCT."
YOUR INSTALLATION OR USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES AND CONSTITUTES
ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS IS A LEGAL AND BINDING AGREEMENT BETWEEN
THE PURCHASER AND BLACK DIAMOND ENGINEERING, INC. ("BDE"). YOU AGREE THAT THIS
AGREEMENT SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS COMMUNICATIONS AND THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS
THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND BDE.
THIS AGREEMENT MAY ONLY BE MODIFIED BY A WRITING SIGNED BY BDE.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, RETURN THE UNUSED
PRODUCT TO BDE FOR A FULL REFUND.

B. COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AND LIMITED USE LICENSE


The software which accompanies this License Agreement and/or which is installed as part of the
Diagnostics Tool (the "Software") is the property of BDE and is protected by copyright law and by
other state, federal, and international laws. Any hardware purchased from BDE in connection with
the Software and/or as part of the Diagnostics Tool is referred to as the "Hardware." The terms "you"
and "yours" refer to the Purchaser. While BDE continues to own the Software, you will have certain
rights to use the Software after acceptance of this Agreement. Except as the terms of the limited
warranty set forth below may be modified by a written "Maintenance and Extended Warranty
Agreement" between you and BDE, your rights and obligations with respect to use of the Product are
as specified in this Agreement.

C. NON-EXCLUSIVE LICENSE TO USE SOFTWARE


If the Software is delivered in a form already installed as part of the Diagnostics Tool, or if purchased
as part of a Diagnostics Tool, you may use the Software only as installed as part of and in connection
with the Diagnostics Tool. If the Software is delivered separately, you may use one copy of the
Software on a single computer. The Software cannot be installed or used on a network server or
additional computers. You may not copy or reproduce the Software, download the Software, copy
or reproduce the Documentation which accompanies the Software and/or the Diagnostics Tool, sub-
license, lease, or rent any portion of the Software, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, modify,

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page II


License Agreement and
Limited Warranty

or translate the Software, make any attempt to discover the source code of the Software, or create
derivative works from the Software.

D. LIMITED HARDWARE WARRANTY


BDE warrants that the Hardware components of the Diagnostics Tool will be free from defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of ninety days from the date of shipment from BDE. This
warranty does not cover damage due to external causes, including accident, abuse, misuse, problems
with electrical power, servicing not authorized by BDE, usage not in accordance with product
documentation, usage not in accordance with training and instructions provided by BDE, failure to
perform required preventative maintenance, and problems caused by use of parts and components
not supplied by BDE. BDE will, at its option, repair or replace products covered by this limited
warranty. Any defect in materials or workmanship must be promptly reported to BDE within the
warranty period.
THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. BDE MAKES NO OTHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN. THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF ANY
LIABILITY TO BDE UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, OR UNDER ANY OTHER PART OF THIS
AGREEMENT, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT OF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR THE
PRODUCT. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER
RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.

E. NO SOFTWARE WARRANTY
THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED ABSOLUTELY WITHOUT WARRANTY AND ON AN "AS IS" BASIS.
BDE MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND ON THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WRITTEN OR ORAL, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FACT THAT THERE IS NO
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTIABILITY AND NO IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
BDE PROVIDES NO ASSURANCE OR WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE
WITHOUT DEFECTS OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS OR WILL BE WITHOUT "BUGS." YOU HAVE
THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE WHETHER THE SOFTWARE MEETS YOUR NEEDS
OR IS SUITABLE FOR THE USES YOU INTEND. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ITS USE
AND FOR THE RESULTS OF ITS USE.
YOU ASSUME THE COMPLETE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE TO BE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY REPAIR, SERVICING OR CORRECTIONS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL BDE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS,
LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF, OR THE INABILITY TO USE, THE SOFTWARE OR THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF BDE OR
AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGES.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page III


License Agreement and
Limited Warranty

BDE WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE. BDE ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR USE OF DATA GENERATED BY THE
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL OR FOR ANY CLAIMED DAMAGES OR LOSSES RESULTING FROM THE USE
OR APPLICATION OF SUCH DATA.

F. DISCLAIMER AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY OR RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES


YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING WHETHER THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE,
AND/OR DIAGNOSTICS TOOL MEETS YOUR NEEDS. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR USE
OF THE PRODUCT AND FOR THE RESULTS OF ITS USE. USE OF THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE,
AND/OR DIAGNOSTICS TOOL MAY HAVE SIGNIFICANT SAFETY, PERSONAL INJURY, AND
PHYSICAL DAMAGE RISKS. BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT WITHIN AN INDUSTRIAL FACILITY,
AND PRIOR TO CONNECTING THE PRODUCT TO A CONTROL VALVE, THE USER MUST
CAREFULLY CONSIDER ALL RELEVANT SAFETY ISSUES. ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, POLICIES,
AND PRACTICES MUST BE OBSERVED. THIS PRODUCT MUST BE USED ONLY IN
ACCORDANCE WITH SAFE, ACCEPTED INDUSTRIAL PRACTICES.
BDE OFFERS FORMAL TRAINING FOR OPERATORS OF THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL, WHICH IS
STRONGLY RECOMMENDED. BDE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES
CAUSED BY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE, AND/OR DIAGNOSTICS TOOL, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE CONSEQUENCES OF ANY MOVEMENT OF CONTROL VALVES
CONNECTED TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL.
THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
AVAILABLE TO YOU. REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF
ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE, IN NO EVENT WILL BDE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST REVENUES, LOST
PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR LOST DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PRODUCT EVEN IF BDE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
BDE MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THE FITNESS OF THE
SOFTWARE, HARDWARE, OR DIAGNOSTIC TOOL FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN LIABILITIES SO THE
LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS SET FORTH ABOVE MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IN NO CASE SHALL BDE'S LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT. THE
DISCLAIMERS AND LIMITATIONS SET FORTH ABOVE WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER
YOU ACCEPT THE PRODUCT.

G. AVAILABILITY OF MAINTENANCE PACKAGE AND EXTENDED WARRANTY


A Maintenance and Extended Warranty Agreement is available from BDE for payment of an
additional fee. Absent a written Maintenance and Extended Warranty Agreement signed by BDE, the
sole and exclusive Warranty and obligation of BDE is as set forth herein.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page IV


License Agreement and
Limited Warranty

H. MISCELLANEOUS
Once accepted, this Agreement is effective until terminated. This Agreement shall terminate if you
fail to comply with the terms of the License Agreement. You hereby agree to return the Product upon
termination of the Agreement. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Utah.
Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement or concerning the Product, or if you desire
to contact BDE for any reason, please write: Black Diamond Engineering, 8180 South 700 East,
Sandy, Utah USA 84070.

READ THIS ENTIRE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT.


USE OF THE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF THIS
AGREEMENT.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page V


License Agreement and
Limited Warranty

COPYRIGHT NOTICE
© Copyright Black Diamond Engineering, Inc. 1996 - 2002

All Rights Reserved.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission from Black Diamond
Engineering is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

First Edition, December 1996, Version 2.50


Second Edition, September 1998, Version 3.00
Third Edition, April 2000, Version 4.00
Fourth Edition, August 2003, Version 5.00

TRADEMARK CREDITS

BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ is a trademark of Black Diamond Engineering, Inc.

Black Diamond Engineering is a trademark of Black Diamond Engineering Inc.

Microsoft is a registered U.S. trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corp.

All other trademarks and trade names shown are the property of their respective owners.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page VI


Table of Contents
License Agreement and Limited Warranty ------------------------------ II
Copyright Notice -------------------------------------------------------------- VI
Table of Contents ------------------------------------------------------------- VII
Chapter 1, Introducing BenchMark
Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------1-1
BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ ---------------------------------1-2
Improved Valve Repair Cycle ----------------------------------------------1-3
Benefits of Testing ------------------------------------------------------------1-4
Summary of Features --------------------------------------------------------1-5
Summary of Standard Tests-------------------------------------------------1-6

Chapter 2, Safety
Warnings and Cautions -----------------------------------------------------2-1

Chapter 3, Hardware
Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------3-1
List of System Components-------------------------------------------------3-2
Test Computer ----------------------------------------------------------------3-3
Installation - Interconnect Box and Battery ------------------------------3-4
General Setup Instructions--------------------------------------------------3-5
Installation - Double Acting Actuator -------------------------------------3-9
Installation - Single Acting Actuator ---------------------------------------3-12
Installation - Rotary Valve---------------------------------------------------3-15
Interconnect Box -------------------------------------------------------------3-18
Specifications - Test Computer --------------------------------------------3-20
Specifications - Transducers ------------------------------------------------3-21

Chapter 4, Starting BenchMark


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------4-1
Software Version and Copyright Notice----------------------------------4-2
Software License Check -----------------------------------------------------4-3
Check of Data Storage Paths -----------------------------------------------4-4
System Calibration Check---------------------------------------------------4-5
Transducer Calibration Check ---------------------------------------------4-6
Warnings and Cautions------------------------------------------------------4-7
Main Operations Menu -----------------------------------------------------4-8

Page VII
Table of Contents

Chapter 5, Locate Record


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------5-1
New or Existing Record Option--------------------------------------------5-2
Changing Data / Graph File Storage Path --------------------------------5-3
Changing Menu, Catalog and Standard Rules Path --------------------5-4
Selecting Paths Based on the Customer ----------------------------------5-5
Automatic Windows™ Path Creation-------------------------------------5-6
Locate Existing Record ------------------------------------------------------5-8
Record Entry / Selection by Work List ------------------------------------5-11
Find Lost Records ------------------------------------------------------------5-15
Find Lost Records by THistory Table -------------------------------------5-16
Find Lost Records by ID Information -------------------------------------5-17
Find Lost Records by Test Date --------------------------------------------5-18
Find Lost Records by Graph Filename------------------------------------5-19

Chapter 6, Valve Configuration Information


Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------6-1
Valve Identification – New Record----------------------------------------6-2
Valve Identification – Existing Record ------------------------------------6-3
Configuration -----------------------------------------------------------------6-4
Trim (Seat) --------------------------------------------------------------------6-7
Actuator ------------------------------------------------------------------------6-8
Positioning System – General Overview ---------------------------------6-11
Positioning System – I/P Signal Source -----------------------------------6-12
Positioning System – P/P Signal Source-----------------------------------6-13
Positioning System – I/P Direct Signal Source ---------------------------6-14
Positioning System – Digital Signal Source-------------------------------6-15
Positioning System – Hart Signal Source ---------------------------------6-16
Export Record-----------------------------------------------------------------6-17
Note Entry ---------------------------------------------------------------------6-18

Chapter 7, Valve Application Information


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------7-1
Images --------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
Service Conditions -----------------------------------------------------------7-3
Pipeline ------------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
Process -------------------------------------------------------------------------7-5
Control Loop ------------------------------------------------------------------7-6
Materials -----------------------------------------------------------------------7-7
Export Record ----------------------------------------------------------------7-8
Note Entry ---------------------------------------------------------------------7-9

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page VIII


Table of Contents

Chapter 8, Report Tools


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------8-1
Automatic Report Generator -----------------------------------------------8-2
Report Element Preview ----------------------------------------------------8-4
Specific Test Recall-----------------------------------------------------------8-5
SmartPath Searching ---------------------------------------------------------8-6
PDF Report Preparation-----------------------------------------------------8-7
PDF Viewer--------------------------------------------------------------------8-9
Transfer Selected Records --------------------------------------------------8-10

Chapter 9, Calibrate Valve Utility


Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------9-1
Operator Caution ------------------------------------------------------------9-2
Transducer Setup-------------------------------------------------------------9-3
Transducer Adjustment------------------------------------------------------9-4
Referencing Function --------------------------------------------------------9-6
Valve Seat Reference -------------------------------------------------------9-8
Valve Calibration Tool ------------------------------------------------------9-9
Mid-Span Friction Estimate ------------------------------------------------9-11
FieldBus Network AutoLink ------------------------------------------------9-12
Control Signal Output [Digital]---------------------------------------------9-13

Chapter 10, Baseline Test


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------10-1
Operator Caution ------------------------------------------------------------10-2
Baseline Test ------------------------------------------------------------------10-3
Baseline Test Results ---------------------------------------------------------10-4
Baseline Graphs --------------------------------------------------------------10-5
Graph Annotation ------------------------------------------------------------10-6
Baseline Parameters----------------------------------------------------------10-7
Baseline Test Report ---------------------------------------------------------10-9
Baseline Test Notes ----------------------------------------------------------10-10

Chapter 11, Accuracy Tests


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------11-1
Operator Caution ------------------------------------------------------------11-2
HDRL Test ---------------------------------------------------------------------11-3
HDRL Test Results -----------------------------------------------------------11-4
HDRL Test Report------------------------------------------------------------11-5
HDRL Test Notes ------------------------------------------------------------11-6
DeadBand Test ---------------------------------------------------------------11-7
DeadBand Test Results ------------------------------------------------------11-8

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page IX


Table of Contents

DeadBand Test Report ------------------------------------------------------11-9


DeadBand Test Notes -------------------------------------------------------11-10

Chapter 12, Dynamic Tests


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------12-1
Operator Caution ------------------------------------------------------------12-2
Step Utility Test ---------------------------------------------------------------12-3
Step Response Test-----------------------------------------------------------12-7
Resolution Test----------------------------------------------------------------12-13
Sensitivity Test ----------------------------------------------------------------12-17
Frequency Response Test ---------------------------------------------------12-21

Chapter 13, Passive Monitor


Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------13-1
Operator Warning------------------------------------------------------------13-2
Passive Monitor Setup -------------------------------------------------------13-3
Passive Monitor, Recording Data ------------------------------------------13-7
Output File Format-----------------------------------------------------------13-8

Chapter 14, Test Standards


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------14-1
Standards Menu -------------------------------------------------------------14-2
Baseline Calibration Standards --------------------------------------------14-3
Baseline Actuator Standards -----------------------------------------------14-4
Baseline Positioner / Signal Transducer Standards ---------------------14-5
Baseline Standards Report -------------------------------------------------14-6
HDRL Standards -------------------------------------------------------------14-7
Deadband Standards -------------------------------------------------------14-8
Resolution Standards --------------------------------------------------------14-9
Sensitivity Standards --------------------------------------------------------14-10
Step Response Standards ---------------------------------------------------14-11
Frequency Response Standards -------------------------------------------14-12
Accuracy / Dynamic Standards Report ----------------------------------14-13

Chapter 15, Database Tools


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------15-1
BenchMark Database--------------------------------------------------------15-2
Menu Table Editing ----------------------------------------------------------15-3
Catalog Table Editing --------------------------------------------------------15-4
Find Utility --------------------------------------------------------------------15-5
Order Utility-------------------------------------------------------------------15-7
SQL Query --------------------------------------------------------------------15-8

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page X


Table of Contents

Structured Query Language, SQL -----------------------------------------15-9


Export Table Function -------------------------------------------------------15-10
Table Report Function-------------------------------------------------------15-11

Chapter 16, Configure System


Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------16-1
Transducer Selection --------------------------------------------------------16-2
Transducer Table Generation ----------------------------------------------16-3
Update Transducer Calibration --------------------------------------------16-4
Update Calibration – Select Files ------------------------------------------16-5
Calibration Report------------------------------------------------------------16-6
Data Management -----------------------------------------------------------16-7
Set System Units --------------------------------------------------------------16-11
System Options --------------------------------------------------------------16-12
System Information ----------------------------------------------------------16-14
Customer Path Options -----------------------------------------------------16-16

Chapter 17, Troubleshooting


Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------17-2
Problems and Checklists ---------------------------------------------------17-3
Customer Service ------------------------------------------------------------17-6

Chapter 18, Glossary


Definition of Technical Terms----------------------------------------------18-1
Definitions of Reported Parameters
Baseline----------------------------------------------------------------------18-16
HDRL-------------------------------------------------------------------------18-19
DeadBand -------------------------------------------------------------------18-20
Step Utility ------------------------------------------------------------------18-21
Step Response --------------------------------------------------------------18-23
Sensitivity--------------------------------------------------------------------18-25
Resolution -------------------------------------------------------------------18-26
Frequency Response-------------------------------------------------------18-27

Appendices
A- Viewing Graphs --------------------------------------------------------A-1
B- Summary of Data Tables ---------------------------------------------B-1
C- Custom Configuration Menus ---------------------------------------C-1
D- Pass / Fail Annotation -------------------------------------------------D-1
E- Default Standards Calculation---------------------------------------E-1
F- Task File Format -------------------------------------------------------F-1

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page XI


1
Introducing BenchMark

Page

Overview 1-1
BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ 1-2
Improved Valve Repair Cycle 1-3
Benefits of Testing 1-4
Summary of Features 1-5
Summary of Standard Tests 1-6
Introducing BenchMark

Overview
Properly functioning air-operated control valves are vital for the safe and efficient operation of a
production facility. Until recently, operators and maintenance personnel were unable to directly
verify and document the function of critical air-operated control valves. Now, equipped with
modern portable computers and data acquisition hardware, technicians and engineers can test
the performance of critical control valves while they remain in-line. Problems can be quickly
diagnosed and the valves requiring removal and shop repair can be accurately identified. Valves
with minor valve problems can be repaired while in line, saving considerable time, expense and
risk. Further, the operator can document that the tested valves are properly setup and
functioning.

“Valve diagnostics systems are difficult to learn and difficult to use, right?” Wrong !

It is easy to see why this understandable, but mistaken, perception has developed. Early control
valve diagnostics systems were cumbersome, were time-consuming to install, were difficult to
operate, and produced results that were difficult to interpret and report. This is no longer true.
As you move through this guide, you will find that you do not have to be a computer expert or a
factory valve engineer to use BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ and determine if your
valves are working properly.
It is common for new diagnostic system operators to have many years of hands-on valve and
practical control experience. It is important to recognize that this system is a powerful tool that
assists you in identifying, demonstrating and correcting valve problems. Your experience is a
very important part of the diagnostic process!
A common barrier to effectively applying control valve diagnostics is the technical jargon. Often,
specialized terms are casually tossed about but seldom clearly explained. You may be surprised
to learn that you already know many of these “new” terms. You most likely learned them in the
context of instrument calibration and process control. To help in this regard, technical terms used
in BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ will be explained in context and in a detailed
technical glossary contained in Chapter 18.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 1-1


Introducing BenchMark

BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™


Congratulations on your selection of the BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™!

BenchMark is the most advanced control valve diagnostic system available. It combines the
latest technology in portable computing, data acquisition, instrumentation and software to help
you efficiently and effectively maintain your air-operated control valves.
This operator’s guide will familiarize you with the setup and the operation of BenchMark. As the
various functions are explained and explored, you will see how BenchMark has been designed
with the efficiency of the operator in mind.
Our design philosophy is straight-forward; by using the latest in hardware and software
technologies, we make it easy and practical for owners to upgrade to newer technologies as they
become available.
BenchMark uses an extremely rugged, portable, computer platform designed by a leading
computer manufacturer for use in the “real-world” environment of a plant or a valve shop. It is
water-proof (available in NEMA 4), dust-proof, shock and drop resistant. It is available with the
latest processors, the large sunlight readable displays and high capacity plug-in hard drives. Dual
micro-processors are coordinated to acquire data independent of the multitasking features of
Windows™, assuring accurate, reliable data acquisition with time-saving real-time testing
displays.
BenchMark is Windows™ based and operates under Windows9x™, Windows2000™ and
Windows NT4.0™. It uses the graphical user interface, GUI, to make the software intuitive and
easy to learn and use. Many operators are functional after only a few hours of hands-on training.
Record handling is automated from entry through the preparation of pre-formatted custom
reports and graphs. Wherever possible, clerical activities are eliminated. Test setup is efficient; it
is easy to learn and practical to apply in the field.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 1-2


Introducing BenchMark

Improved Valve Repair Cycle

Figure 1.1
Improved
Valve Repair
Cycle

Step 1: Documented Function: Valves are setup correctly and their function is documented.
Valves returned from the repair vendor have validated performance that satisfies the unit
requirements. New valves are tested upon receipt from the manufacturer and prior to
installation; there is no wasted installation effort with deficient valves.
Step 2: In-Plant Testing: The valve end-user electronically provides the repair vendors with
valve records, menu lists and performance standards. Everyone works from the “same page” with
a minimum of clerical work. Target valves and relevant accessories are tested at the start of turn-
around. Only valves that cannot be fixed in line are pulled. A detailed test report accompanies all
valves sent for repair.
Step 3: Shared Data, Shared Expectations: Valves arrive at the repair shop with “as-found” test
records including detailed technical notes. The repair vendor having access to the end-user’s
performance standards for each valve will produce expectations for the repairs that are clear and
defined. Repair efforts can then be focused to ensure efficient and effective resolution to
performance problems.
Step 4: Documented Repair Quality: At repair completion, valves are tested and their
performance is documented. Maintenance histories are updated and test data is passed back to
the end-user for trending and archival.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 1-3


Introducing BenchMark

Benefits of Testing
Maintenance Benefits
If valve problems and performance expectations are defined when the valves arrive at the repair
shop, maintenance labor is used efficiently. Rework and fault finding are kept to a minimum. Post-
repair testing, documents proper valve function and clearly establishes repair quality. The more subtle
repair procedures, such as, setting stem packing pre-loads and checking the actuator leak, are
simplified, standardized and documented. Valve data is consolidated into one easily accessed
database.

Production Unit Benefits


Properly setup and maintained valves result in more unit uptime and therefore more products. Valve
problems can be isolated faster, saving wasted hours tuning and troubleshooting control problems.
Properly operating control valves throttle better and are less prone to “hunting” type instability.
Improved control leads to better yields and higher efficiencies. The actual dynamic response and
control capabilities of the various air-operated control valves can be clearly and efficiently defined
and control strategies can be appropriately devised.

Plant Productivity Benefits


The name of the game is efficiency. Fewer valves pulled results in shorter turn-around times and
therefore more plant uptime. Additionally, less money and time are wasted on unnecessary repairs.
Maintenance efforts are focused more effectively. BenchMark 5.0 provides an efficient and economic
means of collecting data for the development of a predictive maintenance program. Future
maintenance decisions and control valve purchases can be based on engineering facts.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 1-4


Introducing BenchMark

Summary of Features
Following is a brief summary of the many features of BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™.
♦ Easy to Learn, Straightforward to use

♦ Intuitive, Powerful, Windows™ Interface

♦ Quick Setup / Hookup to Valves

♦ Automatic Report Generation

♦ Minimal Clerical Work Required

♦ Field Portable, Small and Lightweight

♦ Battery Powered

♦ Tests All Types of Air Operated Control Valves

♦ No Complex Graphical Interpretation

♦ Predefined Graphs Clarify Key Results

♦ Clear Pass / Fail Comparisons

♦ Superior Database Access / Queries

♦ NEMA 4 (IP66) Computer and Accessories

♦ Latest Computer and Transducer Technology

♦ Dedicated Microprocessor for Data Acquisition

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 1-5


Introducing BenchMark

Summary of Standard Tests


BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ performs the following standard tests:

Baseline Test
♦ Maximum and Span Travel (Rotation)
♦ Valve Calibration
♦ Overall Valve Response Errors
♦ Positioner Calibration
♦ Positioner Response Errors
♦ I/P Calibration
♦ I/P Response Errors
♦ I/P Linearity
♦ Bench set, Spring Rate
♦ Friction
♦ Seat Load
♦ Balance Pressure
♦ Air Supply Pressure Change
Frequency Response
♦ Amplitude Ratio
♦ Phase Lag
HDRL
♦ Static Hysteresis and DeadBand Error
♦ Static Repeatability Error
♦ Static Linearity Error
♦ Quasi-Static DeadBand Error
Passive Monitoring of Valve Parameters
♦ Measurement of Selective Channels vs. Time
Sensitivity / Resolution
♦ Step Sensitivity
♦ Step Resolution
Step Response
♦ Dead Time
♦ Response Time
♦ Rise Time
♦ Mid-Stroke Velocity
♦ Overshoot
♦ Settling Time

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 1-6


2
Safety

Page

Warnings and Cautions 2-1


Safety

Warnings and Cautions


Please carefully read the following safety cautions and warnings.
THIS PRODUCT MUST BE USED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH ALL
FACILITY SAFETY RULES, PROCEDURES AND PRACTICE. IF YOU ARE IN
DOUBT, ASK!
The system operator is solely responsible for determining whether it is appropriate to use the
software, hardware and / or diagnostics procedures prior to any valve testing.
Use of this software, hardware and / or these diagnostic procedures may have significant safety,
personal injury and physical damage risks. Before testing within an industrial facility and prior to
connecting the test system to a control valve, the user must carefully consider all relevant safety
issues. All plant safety precautions, policies and practices must be observed. Use this product
ONLY in accordance with safe, accepted industrial practices.
Black Diamond Engineering offers formal training for operators of BenchMark Control Valve
Diagnostics™. This training is strongly recommended for all operators.

1. Observe ALL facility safety precautions, procedures, policies and practices.

2. DO NOT connect the test system to a control valve that is unsafe to move.

3. DO NOT CONNECT THE BENCHMARK CONTROL SIGNAL TO A VALVE


THAT IS IN-SERVICE.

4. BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ is NOT rated for use in


HAZARDOUS AREAS.

5. The valve will move under the control of the computer WITHOUT PRIOR
WARNING. Make certain that this motion will cause no harm to personnel,
equipment or the facility.

6. Use CAUTION when connecting transducers to the valve! Make connections


with the valve off-line and isolated from the process. Beware of pinch
points and unexpected valve movements.

7. Connection to the pressure ports of the positioner, actuator or signal


transducer can disrupt process control if the valve is in-service or on-line.
Consult plant personnel for authorization before attempting any
connection to an in-service or in-line valve.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 2-1


Safety

8. If you have any questions regarding the safe and proper operation of this
system, do not operate it. Consult the operator’s manual or a trained
experienced operator.

9. Do NOT disrupt the process control signal to a valve that is in-service.

10. Do NOT disrupt or restrict the air supply to a valve that is in-service.

BLACK DIAMOND ENGINEERING EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY FOR


DAMAGES BY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, HARDWARE AND / OR DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE CONSEQUENCES OF ANY
MOVEMENT OF CONTROL VALVES CONNECTED TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL. IF
YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING THIS, PLEASE CONSULT THE WRITTEN
LICENSE AGREEMENT ACCOMPANYING THIS SYSTEM.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 2-2


3
Hardware

Page

Overview 3-1
List of System Components 3-2
Test Computer 3-3
Installation - Interconnect Box and Battery 3-4
General Setup Instructions 3-5
Installation - Double Acting Actuator 3-9
Installation - Single Acting Actuator 3-12
Installation - Rotary Valve 3-15
Interconnect Box 3-18
Specifications - Test Computer 3-20
Specifications - Transducers 3-21
Hardware

Overview
Prior to testing, it is necessary to connect a displacement transducer and several pressure
transducers to the valve. These transducers measure: valve travel (or shaft rotation), signal
pressure, actuator pressure (single acting) or top and bottom cylinder pressures (double acting)
and supply pressure.
This chapter describes three typical transducer installations: single acting actuator, double acting
actuators, and a typical rotary valve. These examples are not intended to cover all control valves
that may be encountered. As you are aware, there are many different styles of air operated
control valves and each one is different in design, tubing, accessories and installation. You will
find, however, that most installations will be described by one of the three examples shown. In
all cases, the operator’s ingenuity and resourcefulness are the best tools.
BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ uses specific types and ranges of transducers. Do not use
transducers or cables that are not part of the BenchMark system, even if they are believed to be
“equivalent”. Connection of inappropriate hardware can result in damage to the computer, data
acquisition system and transducers.

CAUTION! DO NOT SUBSTITUTE “EQUIVALENT” COMPONENTS. IF REPLACEMENT


PARTS ARE REQUIRED, CONTACT BLACK DIAMOND ENGINEERING CUSTOMER SERVICE
FOR ASSISTANCE. USE OF NON-STANDARD COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE SYSTEM
AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE WARRANTY.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


TRANSDUCER: A device that converts a physical force or displacement into an electrical signal
(current, voltage or frequency).
SINGLE ACTING ACTUATOR: An actuator that in normal operation has pressure acting on one
side only of a diaphragm and acts against a spring.
DOUBLE ACTING ACTUATOR: An actuator that in normal operation has pressure acting on
both sides of a piston within the bore of a cylinder. It requires the use of a valve positioner.
Some designs employ a diaphragm variant of the piston.
VALVE TRAVEL or SHAFT ROTATION: The motion of the actuated element in a valve that
controls or modulates the fluid or gas moving through the valve. In linear valves (also called “rising
stem” valves) the plug moves linearly into and out of the seat to effect this control. In rotary
valves, the shaft is actuated in a rotary movement of generally 90 degrees moving a plate or ball
within the fluid or gas flow.
VALVE POSITIONER: A mechanical servo control that regulates the position of the valve in
response to an input signal, typically an electrical current or low level air pressure.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-1


Hardware

List of System Components


The following items are standard components of the BenchMark test system.
Qty Unit Part # Description
1 ea. 540012 Test Computer, Portable, NEMA 4
1 ea. 540080 Installed Software, Windows 98™
1 ea. 540090 Installed Software, BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™
1 ea. 540200 Interconnect Box and Cable, 15 ft length
1 ea. 540100 Transducer, Pressure, 30 psig
3 ea. 540101 Transducer, Pressure, 100 psig
1 ea. 540150 Transducer, Cable Potentiometer, 2 inch range
1 ea. 540151 Transducer, Cable Potentiometer, 5 inch range
1 ea. 540180 Cable, Control Signal, 6 ft length
5 ea. 540160 Cable, Transducer to Interconnect, 6 ft length
1 ea. 540350 Transducer Mounting Kit, Displacement
1 ea. 540400 Stem Attachment Kit
1 ea. 540480 Extension Wire Kit
1 ea. 540500 Rotary Shaft Attachment Kit, 7/16 thru 1 ¼“ diameter
1 ea. 540570 Travel Case, System, Codura™ fabric
1 ea. 540580 Travel Case, Transducers
1 ea. 540590 Standard Tool Kit
1 ea. 540670 BenchMark User’s Manual

The following items are optional components of the BenchMark test system.
Qty Unit Part # Description
1 ea. 541010 Computer, Rack mount
1 ea. 541100 Tool Cabinet, Roll Around
1 ea. 540082 Installed Software, Microsoft Office™
1 ea. 540102 Transducer, Pressure, 250 psig
1 ea. 540152 Transducer, Cable Potentiometer, 10 inch range
1 ea. 540153 Transducer, Cable Potentiometer, 15 inch range
1 ea. 540154 Transducer, Cable Potentiometer, 20 inch range
1 ea. 540155 Transducer, Cable Potentiometer, 30 inch range
1 ea. 540245 Cable, Interconnect to Computer Extension, 10 ft length
1 ea. 540246 Cable, Interconnect to Computer Extension, 25 ft length
1 ea. 540247 Cable, Interconnect to Computer Extension, Custom Length
1 ea. 540610 Quick Disconnect Fitting Kit
1 ea. 540595 Custom Tool Kit
1 ea. 540620 Battery Pack, External
1 ea. 540630 Battery Charger
1 ea. 540650 Portable Printer
1 ea. 540660 Remote I/P Transducer
1 ea. 540665 Shipping Transport Container

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-2


Hardware

Test Computer
11.3” Ultra-Bright
VGA Color LCD Display
Battery Power
Indicator Lights

Power On/Off

TouchPad
with Left and Right
“mouse” buttons

Figure 3.1
BenchMark
Test
Computer

Floppy Drive and


PCMCIA Access Door

Interconnect Attachment Port


The standard BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ computer contains the following:
CPU Intel Pentium 266 MHz or later
On-Board DRAM 64 MB (to 128 MB Optional)
Storage Device 6 GB, Removable Hard Drive or larger
Fixed 3.5 inch 1.44 MB Floppy Disk Drive
Display 11.3” Ultra-Bright VGA Color LCD
Power Source On-board Rechargeable (replaceable) Ni-MH Battery
110 / 220 VAC with Provided DC Converter
Optional 4hr (nominal life) Battery Pack
Keyboard 85 Key, NEMA 4 rated, keyboard with TouchPad
Data Acquisition Internal, 8 channel, 16 bit A/D
Internal, 2 channel, 16 bit D/A
I/O Devices One Serial port, D-Type 9 pin
One Video Out (VGA)
One Parallel port, D-Type 25 pin
Expansion Two PCMCIA Slots, 2 type II or 1 type III
Other options and upgrade features are available.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-3


Hardware

Installation - Interconnect Box and Battery

Test System
Battery Pack
Computer
(Optional)
Attachment
Port

Figure 3.2 Interconnect


Interconnect Cable Power Input:
Box and 110 volt A/C Adapter or
Battery Ext. Battery Pack
Connections Other input voltages are
available

Interconnect
Box
WARNING! THE INTERCONNECT BOX SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE TEST
COMPUTER ONLY WITH THE COMPUTER POWERED OFF.

WARNING! DO NOT ALLOW THE COMPUTER TO EXHAUST THE BATTERY PACK


WITH THE WINDOWS™ PROGRAM RUNNING, TURN OFF THE COMPUTER WHEN THE
LOW BATTERY INDICATORS ARE LIGHTED AND THE BEEPING TONE IS HEARD. IF THE
COMPUTER IS ALLOWED TO DEPLETE THE BATTERIES, COMPUTER FILES CAN BE
DAMAGED AND DATA LOST. REGULARLY BACK UP THE HARD DRIVE TO PROTECT
YOUR WORK!

Steps to Proceed:

1. Refer to Figure 3.2, Interconnect Box and Battery Connection.


2. With the computer turned off, connect the Interconnect Box to the Test Computer.
3. Connect the A/C power converter OR the optional Battery Pack to the Test Computer and
power ON. Make certain that the Battery Pack is fully charged.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-4


Hardware

General Setup Instructions


(Continued from previous page)

Pressure Gauge

Quick Connect
Male Fitting
(Optional) Pressure
Transducer

Figure 3.3
I/P
Transducer Quick Connect
Connection Connect to Female Fitting
Positioner (Optional)

Generally, it is convenient to connect the pressure transducers at the valve positioner by replacing
the small pressure gauges normally found there. The use of quick connect fittings will make future
testing faster and easier.
Pressure Pressure Gauge
Transducer

Quick
Connect Male
Fitting
Figure 3.4
Alternate “tee” Pneumatic Fitting
Transducer
Connection
Quick Connect
Female Fitting
(Optional)
If it is not possible to connect at the positioner gauge ports, a “tee” or other pressure fitting may
need to be inserted into the pneumatic lines to the valve. Consult the manufacturer’s catalog and
maintenance literature to locate the correct positioner ports.

CAUTION! LEAKS CAN AFFECT TEST RESULTS AND VALVE OPERATION. CAREFULLY LEAK
CHECK ALL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CONNECTIONS PRIOR TO TESTING.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-5


Hardware

General Setup instructions


(Continued from previous page)
The BenchMark system actively controls the valve during the test. Therefore the valve must be
temporarily disconnected from the facility control system and an electrical control signal
connection be made from the BenchMark system to the valve’s I/P transducer. If the valve
positioner is being operated by signal pressure, the operator must provide a remote I/P transducer
and connect the BenchMark control signal to it.
Valve positioner

Pressure
Transducers
Installed in
Gage Ports

I/P Transducer
with Cover Off
Figure 3.5
I/P Transducer
Connection Observe Polarity: Connect RED to the “+”,
BLACK to the “−” terminal. Attach Securely.

Control Signal Cable to Interconnect Box

CAUTION! CAREFULLY OBSERVE THE POLARITY OF ANY CONNECTION TO AN I/P


TRANSDUCER. PROPERLY CONNECT THE CONTROL SIGNAL CABLE AND SECURE AGAINST
VIBRATION.

WARNING! THE CONTROL VALVE WILL MOVE UNDER THE CONTROL OF THE TEST
COMPUTER WITHOUT ANY PRIOR NOTICE OR WARNING. MAKE SURE THAT THIS MOTION
WILL NOT CAUSE ANY HARM TO PERSONNEL, PROCESS OR PLANT. IF YOU ARE UNSURE
WHETHER IT IS SAFE TO MOVE THE CONTROL VALVE, DISCONNECT THE TEST SYSTEM AND
CONSULT SUPERVISORY OR SAFETY PERSONNEL.

WARNING! NEVER connect to an active or pressurized control valve!

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-6


Hardware

General Setup Instructions


(Continued from previous page)
It is necessary to attach to the valve stem to measure the motion of the control valve. The
following versatile attachments are included as a part of the standard BenchMark Stem
Attachment Kit.

Knurled Knob
Sliding Transducer
Cable Attachment

Slip Over Takeoff


Arm and Secure by
Tightening

Primary Stem
Attachment Segment

Extension Segment

Can be threaded directly into


Adjustment Block on Certain
Single Acting Actuators

Figure 3-6
Stem Slide Fork Under
Attachment Kit Actuator Stem and Valve Stem
Connector Jam Nut

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-7


Hardware

General Setup Instructions


This section contains information and advisories applicable to all installations. Please read and
review this information carefully. The hardware provided with the BenchMark system has been
selected for accuracy, durability and ease of use. Following these precautions will help avoid
unnecessary problems and downtime.

CAUTION! ALWAYS USE CAUTION WHEN HANDLING OR OPERATING THE SYSTEM. THE
TEST COMPUTER IS A RUGGEDIZED INDUSTRIAL NOTEBOOK COMPUTER DESIGNED
SPECIFICALLY FOR IN-PLANT AND OUTDOOR USE. HOWEVER, DO NOT DROP, STRIKE OR
EXPOSE THE COMPUTER TO UNNECESSARY SHOCK OR IMPACT.

CAUTION! TRANSDUCERS ARE RATED FOR INDUSTRIAL SERVICE. HOWEVER, DO NOT


DROP, STRIKE OR EXPOSE ANY TRANSDUCER TO UNNECESSARY SHOCK OR IMPACT.
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS ARE RATED FOR ALL GASES AND FLUIDS COMPATIBLE WITH AISI-
316L STAINLESS STEEL. TRANSDUCER BODIES ARE RATED NEMA 4X (IP65). HOWEVER, AVOID
UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE TO WATER AND OTHER FLUIDS.

CAUTION! PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS ARE RATED FOR TEMPERATURES OF -13° TO 185° F.


HOWEVER, AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE TO TEMPERATURE EXTREMES.

CAUTION! PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS ARE PROTECTED AGAINST DAMAGE FROM OVER-


PRESSURE. HOWEVER, IF NORMAL RATED PRESSURE RANGES ARE EXCEEDED BY MORE THAN
50% THE TRANSDUCER MAY CHANGE CALIBRATION AND CAN BE DAMAGED. USE THE
CORRECT TRANSDUCER FOR THE PRESSURE RANGE EXPECTED AND TAKE ALL REASONABLE
PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID OVER-PRESSURE.

CAUTION! DISPLACEMENT TRANSDUCERS ARE RATED FOR TEMPERATURES OF -67° TO


257°F. HOWEVER, AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE TO TEMPERATURE EXTREMES.

CAUTION! DISPLACEMENT TRANSDUCERS ARE WATER AND DUST RESISTANT. DO NOT


EXPOSE THESE TRANSDUCERS TO WATER, OTHER FLUIDS OR HIGH LEVELS OF DUST.
OPTIONAL VERSIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO HANDLE HOSTILE SERVICE ENVIRONMENTS.
CONTACT BLACK DIAMOND ENGINEERING FOR ASSISTANCE.

CAUTION! EXTENDING THE DISPLACEMENT TRANSDUCER CABLE BEYOND THE RATED


STROKE WILL DESTROY THE TRANSDUCER. DO NOT ALLOW THE CABLE TO SNAP BACK INTO
THE HOUSING. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE TRANSDUCER AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE
WARRANTY.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-8


Hardware

Installation - Double Acting Actuator


WARNING! DISCONNECT AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE TO THE VALVE AND EXHAUST
ACTUATOR PRESSURES BEFORE LOOSENING OR REMOVING ANY PRESSURE GAGE OR
FITTING. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING! DO NOT REMOVE ANY I/P TRANSDUCER COVER OR OPEN ANY ELECTRICAL
ENCLOSURE WITHOUT DETERMINING WHETHER THE NEC HAZARDOUS AREA RATING
ALLOWS YOU TO DO SO SAFELY. OBSERVE ALL PLANT SAFETY RULES.

Steps to Proceed:
1. Refer to Figure 3.7, Installation - Double Acting Actuator.
2. Use the tag plate or stroke plate to verify the nominal stroke of the valve. Select a
displacement transducer with the smallest acceptable range for the valve stroke. The
transducer range must always be greater than the valve stroke.
3. Examine the valve stem to positioner attachment (takeoff arm) and determine the best
location for the Stem Attachment. Tighten the knurled knob by hand.
4. Attach the displacement transducer to the side of the actuator cylinder using the Transducer
Mounting Attachment and strap. Align directly over the Stem Attachment, adjust so that the
transducer cable will not be overextended during the full range of valve travel (use extension
cables as necessary) and secure the strap.
5. Connect the transducer cable to the Stem Attachment.
6. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Signal Pressure gage. If a small pressure gage is
not present on the positioner, examine the tubing connecting the I/P transducer to the
Positioner for a tee or similar access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance
literature if you have difficulty identifying this port.
7. Connect the Signal Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended that a
quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.
8. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Top Cylinder Pressure gage. If a small pressure
gage is not present on the positioner, examine the tubing connecting the top chamber of the
actuator (furthest from the valve body) and the Positioner for a tee or similar access point.
Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance literature if you have difficulty identifying this port.
9. Connect the Top Cylinder Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended
that a quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.
10. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Bottom Cylinder Pressure gage. If a small
pressure gage is not present on the positioner, examine the tubing connecting the bottom
chamber of the actuator (closest to the valve body) and the Positioner for a tee or similar
access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance literature if you have difficulty
identifying this port.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-9


Hardware

Installation - Double Acting Actuator


Steps to Proceed:
(Continued from previous page)

11. Connect the Bottom Cylinder Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended
that a quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing
12. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Supply pressure port or connection to the
positioner for a gage, tee or similar access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance
literature if you have difficulty identifying this port.
13. Connect the Supply Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended that a
quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.
14. Turn on the air supply pressure to the valve and check all pressure transducer connections
for leaks. Correct any leaks before proceeding.
15. Remove the I/P transducer cover. Observing the correct polarity, attach the Control Signal
cable to the I/P transducer that controls the valve. In the event that the valve does not have
an I/P transducer, one will need to be provided for the test.
16. Connect the transducer cables to the correct locations on the Interconnect Box. See Figure 3-
10, “Interconnect Box”, for more details.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-10


Hardware

Figure 3.7 Installation - Double Acting

Displacement Transducer and


Attachment Strap Mounting Attachment

Valve Positioner

Signal Pressure Stem Attachment


Transducer
Displacement
Transducer Extension
and Connection

Top Cylinder
Pressure
Transducer
Control
Signal to I/P
Transducer

Interconnect Box

Bottom Cylinder
Pressure Transducer Cable to Test Computer
I/P Transducer
Supply Pressure
Transducer

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version. 5.0 Page 3 - 11


Hardware

Installation - Single Acting Actuator

WARNING! DISCONNECT AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE TO THE VALVE AND EXHAUST


ACTUATOR PRESSURES BEFORE LOOSENING OR REMOVING ANY PRESSURE GAGE OR
FITTING. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING! DO NOT REMOVE ANY I/P TRANSDUCER COVER OR OPEN ANY ELECTRICAL
ENCLOSURE WITHOUT DETERMINING WHETHER THE NEC HAZARDOUS AREA RATING
ALLOWS YOU TO DO SO SAFELY. OBSERVE ALL PLANT SAFETY RULES.

Steps to Proceed:
1. Refer to Figure 3.8, Installation - Single Acting Actuator.
2. Use the tag plate or stroke plate to verify the nominal stroke of the valve. Select a
displacement transducer with the smallest acceptable range for the valve stroke. The
transducer range must always be greater than the valve stroke.
3. Examine the valve stem to positioner attachment (takeoff arm), the stem jam nut and
actuator stem to valve stem coupler. Determine the best location for the Stem Attachment.
Tighten the knurled knob by hand.
4. Attach the displacement transducer to the side of the actuator spring housing using the
Transducer Mounting Attachment and strap. Orient directly over the Stem Attachment,
adjust so that the transducer cable will not be overextended during the full range of valve
travel (use extension cables as necessary) and secure the strap.
5. Connect the transducer cable to the Stem Attachment.
6. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Signal Pressure gage. If a small pressure gage is
not present on the positioner, examine the tubing connecting the I/P transducer to the
Positioner for a tee or similar access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance
literature if you have difficulty identifying this port.
7. Connect the Signal Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended that a
quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.
8. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Actuator Pressure gage. If a small pressure
gage is not present on the positioner, examine the tubing connecting the top chamber of the
actuator (furthest from the valve body) and the Positioner for a tee or similar access point.
Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance literature if you have difficulty identifying this port.
9. Connect the Actuator Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended that a
quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-12


Hardware

Installation - Single Acting Actuator


Steps to Proceed:
(Continued from previous page)
10. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Supply pressure port or connection to the
positioner for a gage, tee or similar access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance
literature if you have difficulty identifying this port.
11. Connect the Supply Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended that a
quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.
12. Turn on air supply pressure to the valve and check all pressure transducer connections for
leaks. Correct any leaks before proceeding.
13. Remove the I/P transducer cover. Observing the correct polarity, attach the Control Signal
cable to the I/P transducer that controls the valve. In the event that the valve does not have
an I/P transducer one will need to be provided for the test.
14. Connect the transducer cables to the correct locations on the Interconnect Box. See Figure 3-
10, “Interconnect Box”, for more details.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-13


Hardware

Figure 3.8 Installation - Single Acting Actuator

Displacement Transducer and


Mounting Attachment

Signal Pressure
Transducer

I/P Transducer

Displacement Transducer
Extension and Connector
Valve Positioner

Stem Attachment
Actuator Pressure
Transducer
Control Signal to I/P
Transducer

Interconnect Box

Supply Pressure Transducer

Cable to Test Computer

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version. 5.0 Page 3 - 14


Hardware

Installation - Rotary Valve


WARNING! DISCONNECT AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE TO THE VALVE AND EXHAUST
ACTUATOR PRESSURES BEFORE LOOSENING OR REMOVING ANY PRESSURE GAGE OR
FITTING. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING! DO NOT REMOVE ANY I/P TRANSDUCER COVER OR OPENING ANY


ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE WITHOUT DETERMINING WHETHER THE NEC HAZARDOUS AREA
RATING ALLOWS YOU TO DO SO SAFELY. OBSERVE ALL PLANT SAFETY RULES.

Steps to Proceed:
1. Refer to Figure 3.9, Installation - Rotary Acting Actuator.
2. Use the tag plate or stroke plate to verify the nominal rotation of the device. Select the 4 inch
range displacement transducer.
3. Examine the valve rotation shaft to determine the best location to attach the Rotary Shaft
Transducer Cable Attachment.
4. Attach the displacement transducer to the side of the actuator cylinder housing or spring
housing using the Transducer Mounting Attachment and strap. Orient directly over the Rotary
Shaft Transducer Cable Attachment, adjust so that the transducer cable will not be overextended
when the valve is rotated through full stroke (use extension cables as necessary) and secure the
strap.
5. Connect the transducer cable to the Rotary Shaft Transducer Cable Attachment.
6. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Signal Pressure gage. If a small pressure gage is
not present on the positioner, examine the tubing connecting the I/P transducer to the Positioner
for a tee or similar access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance literature if you have
difficulty identifying this port.
7. Connect the Signal Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended that a
quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.
8. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Top Cylinder Pressure gage (Actuator Pressure
gage for single acting). If a small pressure gage is not present on the positioner, examine the
tubing connecting the top chamber of the actuator (furthest from the valve body) and the
Positioner for a tee or similar access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance literature if
you have difficulty identifying this port.
9. Connect the Top Cylinder Pressure (Actuator Pressure for single acting) Transducer to this
pneumatic line. It is recommended that a quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-15


Hardware

Installation - Rotary Valve


Steps to Proceed:
(Continued from previous page)
10. Connect the Bottom Cylinder Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended
that a quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing
11. Examine the valve positioner and identify the Supply pressure port or connection to the
positioner for a gage, tee or similar access point. Consult the manufacturer’s maintenance
literature if you have difficulty identifying this port.
12. Connect the Supply Pressure Transducer to this pneumatic line. It is recommended that a
quick disconnect be installed to facilitate future testing.
13. Turn on air supply pressure to the valve and check all pressure transducer connections for
leaks. Correct any leaks before proceeding.
14. Remove the I/P transducer cover. Observing the correct polarity, attach the Control Signal
cable to the I/P transducer that controls the valve. In the event that the valve does not have an
I/P transducer one will need to be provided for the test.
15. Connect the transducer cables to the correct locations on the Interconnect Box. See Figure 3-
10, “Interconnect Box”, for more details.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-16


Hardware

Figure 3.9 Installation - Rotary Valve

Displacement Transducer and


Mounting Attachment Attachment Strap

Valve Yoke

Valve Rotary Shaft Valve Positioner

Top Cylinder
Rotary Shaft
Pressure Transducer
Transducer Cable Attachment
Bottom Cylinder
Pressure Transducer
Valve Body
I/P Transducer

Control Signal to
I/P Transducer

Interconnect Box
Signal Pressure Transducer

Supply Pressure
Transducer

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version. 5.0 Page 3 - 17


Hardware

Figure3.10 Interconnect Box

CONTROL SIGNAL “A”, 0 to 24 milliamps (4 to 20 ma devices)

SIGNAL (A)
CONTROL SIGNAL “B”, 0 to 60 milliamps (10 to 50 ma devices)
OUTPUT

(B) MEASURED TRAVEL, Displacement Transducer Connection, Variable Ranges

MEASURED (0) SIGNAL PRESSURE Transducer Connection, 0 to 30 psig (typical range)


TRAVEL

SIGNAL (1) ACTUATOR PRESSURE Transducer Connection, 0 to 100 psig (single acting)
PRESSURE

ACTUATOR (2)
SUPPLY PRESSURE Transducer Connection, 0 to 100 psig (typical range)
PRESSURE
SINGLE
ACTING

SUPPLY (3)
TOP CYLINDER PRESSURE Transducer Connection, 0 to 100 psig (double acting)
PRESSURE

TOP (4)
BOTTOM CYLINDER PRESSURE Transducer Connection, 0 to 100 psig (double acting)
PRESSURE
DOUBLE
ACTING

BOTTOM (5)
Auxiliary Transducer Connection
PRESSURE
DOUBLE
ACTING
Auxiliary Transducer Connection
(6)

(7)

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version. 5.0 Page 3 - 18


Hardware

Interconnect Box D/A Channel “A”: Control Signal (Output)


Connects to the valve I/P pressure transducer. Current
range is 0 to 24 milliamps. Suitable for testing 4 to 20 ma
devices and typical split ranges.

D/A Channel “B”: Control Signal (Output)


Connects to the valve I/P pressure transducer. Current
range is 0 to 60 milliamps. Suitable for testing 10 to 50
ma devices and typical split ranges.

A/D Channel 0: Displacement transducer.


(0) MEASURED Measures the movement of the valve control element.
TRAVEL Transducer body can be mounted to the valve actuator,
spring housing or to the valve body. BenchMark 5.0
automatically registers and references the transducer.

(1) SIGNAL A/D Channel 1: Signal Pressure transducer.


PRESSURE Measures the pressure created by the I/P transducer and
applied at the input signal port of the positioner.
Typically, a transducer with a 30 psig range.

A/D Channel 2: Actuator Pressure transducer.


(2) ACTUATOR
Measures the pressure at the input of a single acting valve
PRESSURE
actuator. This pressure acts over the effective area of the
SINGLE actuator diaphragm. Typically, a transducer with a 100
ACTING psig range.

(3) SUPPLY A/D Channel 3: Supply Pressure transducer.


PRESSURE Measures the pressure at the supply input of the valve
positioner. Typically, a transducer with a 100 psig
range.
(4) TOP
PRESSURE A/D Channel 4: Top Cylinder Pressure transducer.
Measures the pressure at the input to the top chamber
DOUBLE
(farthest from the valve body) of a double acting actuator.
ACTING
This pressure acts over the top effective area. Typically, a
transducer with a 100 psig range.
(5) BOTTOM
PRESSURE A/D Channel 5: Bottom Cylinder Pressure Transducer.
Measures pressure at the input to the bottom chamber
DOUBLE
(closest to the valve body) of a double valve actuator.
ACTING
This pressure acts over the bottom effective area.
Typically a transducer with a 100 psig range

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-19


Hardware

Specifications - Test Computer


System
Processor Intel Pentium™ 266 or later
Operating System Windows98™ 2nd edition
RAM Memory 64 MB (to 128 MB optional)
BIOS Phoenix Flash BIOS
Display 11.3 inch Ultra Bright Active Matrix Color
800 x 600 Resolution
Keyboard 85 key Membrane Keyboard with Micro Module (NEMA 4)
I/O Ports 2 Channels 16 bit Digital to Analog, Control Signal
8 Channels 16 bit Analog to Digital, Data Acquisition
One Serial RS-232C Serial Ports
One External Monitor (VGA)
One Centronics Parallel Port
External Power Supply Port
Two PCMCIA Slots, 2 type I/II or 1 Type III
3.5 inch 1.44 MB Floppy Disk Drive
Electrical
AC Input 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz AC Adapter
Internal Battery 12 vdc, 3.5 amp-hr, Ni-MH
External Battery 12 vdc, 12 amp-hr, Sealed Lead-Acid
Physical
Dimensions 13.4” (w) 10.4” (d) 4.2” (h)
Weight 16.9 lb
Chassis Aluminum Alloy, Die Cast

Environmental Standard Operating Storage


Temperature 32 to 120 °F -40 to 160 °F
Humidity 5 to 95% RH 5 to 95% RH
Non-condensing Non-condensing
Altitude 15,000 ft 40,000 ft
Vibration IEC 68-2-6 1.2 g, 55-500 Hz 2.0 g, 55-500 Hz
Shock IEC 68-2-27 15 g, 11ms 40 g, 11ms
Drop IEC 68-2-32 3 ft free drop, concrete, survive
Enclosure IEC 529, NEMA IP66/NEMA 4 Rubber Keyboard / Micro Module
FCC Compliance FCC Part 15 Class B
Safety Approvals UL, CSA, TUV, IEC950 CE Marking

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-20


Hardware

Specifications - Transducers
Displacement Transducer
Sensing Element Hybrid Conductive Plastic Potentiometer
Range (1) 0-2, (1) 0-5 inches standard (Optional Ranges, See Page 3-3)
Weight 12 oz.
Connector KPT02A-10-6P
KPT06A-10-6S, mating
Linearity 0.05 % fs
Resolution Essentially Infinite
Thermal Zero Shift 0.002% per degree F
Thermal Span Shift 0.002% per degree F
Temperature Range -67 to 257 ° F
Humidity 100%, Condensing
Shock 13,500 g for 10ms
Vibration 10 g at 2000 Hz

Pressure Transducer
Sensing Element Silicon Piezoresistive Sensor
Range 0-30, 0-100 psig, Higher Ranges Available
Reference Vented to atmospheric pressure
Burst Pressure ≥ 10 X Rated Pressure
Pressure Media Liquids or gases compatible to AISI-316L Stainless Steel
Combined Hysteresis
Repeatability and 0.05 % FRO typical
Linearity Error 0.10 % FRO maximum
Humidity 95% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing
Vibration ± 20 g MIL-STD-810C, Procedure 514.2
Shock 50 g, 11 msec half-sine, MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B
Combined Thermal
Zero and Span Shift 0.0125 % FRO / °C
Weight 5.9 oz.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 3-21


4
Starting BenchMark

Page
Overview 4-1
Software Version and Copyright Notice 4-2
Software License Check 4-3
Check of Data Storage Paths 4-4
System Calibration Check 4-5
Transducer Calibration Check 4-6
Warnings and Cautions 4-7
Main Operations Menu 4-8
Starting BenchMark

Overview
WARNING! THE INTERCONNECT BOX SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE COMPUTER
ONLY WITH THE COMPUTER POWERED OFF. PLEASE CONNECT THE INTERCONNECT BOX
AS SHOWN IN CHAPTER 3, HARDWARE, AND POWER THE COMPUTER AT THIS TIME.

WARNING! PROTECT YOUR WORK. REGULARLY BACK UP THE DATA ON THE SYSTEM
HARD DRIVE. CHECK YOUR SYSTEM FOR COMPUTER VIRUSES REGULARLY.

BenchMark is delivered completely installed, tested and calibrated. No further


installation is required. Should it become necessary to reinstall BenchMark
Control Valve Diagnostics™ Software, please contact Black Diamond
Engineering Customer Service (See Chapter 17) for prompt assistance.
It is presumed that the operator has a basic understanding of the Microsoft Windows™ operating
system and is minimally knowledgeable of the Graphic User Interface, GUI and the use of the
mouse or ‘touch-pad’ window-pointing device. These topics are covered in a variety of sources
and will not be repeated here. If you have not used a Windows™ based computer application
before, please consult a Windows™ manual prior to operating BenchMark Control Valve
Diagnostics™.
BenchMark is operated from a central, twelve options, Main Operation Menu that logically
groups the various program functions. Each of these groupings is discussed in this manual as a
separate chapter. This chapter discusses the steps required to move from program start-up to the
Main Operation Menu.
Where appropriate, a screen image will be displayed with key elements identified. The operator
should follow the key entry instructions given. Alternate short-cut keystrokes are shown in
brackets [ ].

The following definitions may prove helpful:


GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI): The screen style and entry technique of Windows™ and
similar PC Software. Entry to the computer is both by keyboard and by a pointing device,
commonly a mouse, trackball or a touch-pad. This technique creates a very natural, intuitive entry
and provides screen elements that respond to the operator, e.g. “click” a control button and see
the button depress on the screen.
ALTERNATE SHORT-CUT KEYSTROKES: While using the GUI, an operator may prefer to use a
keystroke to enter a command or “click” a control. To allow this, most command keys have an
underlined letter in the command title that indicates the letter when accompanied by the ALT
key that will actuate that command. For instance, a command key labeled “CONTINUE” will
actuate by the short-cut keystroke “ALT” + “C”.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-1


Starting BenchMark

Software Version and Copyright Notice

Figure 4.1
Software
Version and
Copyright
Notice

Steps to Proceed:

1. BenchMark starts with a screen displaying the software version number, release date and an
important notice regarding the copyright ownership of the software. Please read this notice
carefully and consult the written Software License that accompanies this system if you have
any questions.
2. After reading the information displayed, click ACKNOWLEDGED [A] to continue.
3. Click EXIT [E] to not continue.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-2


Starting BenchMark

Software License Check

Figure 4.2
Software
License
Check

Steps to Proceed:

1. BenchMark will automatically perform a software license check and display the Licensed
Owner of the software and the installation Serial Number. Also, an important notice is
displayed describing the allowable installation and use of the software. Please read this
notice carefully. If you have any questions, please refer to the written Software License
Agreement that accompanies this system.

2. Should a problem with the registration be encountered, the operator will be instructed to
enter information contained on the Individual License provided to the Licensed Owner at
system delivery. Please keep this Individual License in a safe place. In the unlikely event that
this situation arises, please contact Black Diamond Engineering for assistance.

3. After reading the information displayed, click ACKNOWLEDGED [A] to continue.

4. Click EXIT [E] to not continue.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-3


Starting BenchMark

Check of Data Storage Paths

Figure 4.3
Check of
Data
Source Paths

Steps to Proceed:

1. BenchMark Version 5.0 can access and store data on any Windows™ path available to the
test computer. Default data and graph file storage paths are specified in the BenchMark
system configuration.
2. On start-up, BenchMark automatically checks these default data paths to determine if they
are available and contain the proper BenchMark data structures. If data structures are
missing, replacement structures will be automatically placed on the specified path. This
process requires no operator intervention.
3. During this check, BenchMark 5.0 will automatically update the structure of Version 4.0
BenchMark data tables. In this automated process, all data are backed up prior to
conversion and can be restored or archived as necessary. However, it is recommended that
all data be backed up separately prior to installation and structure conversion.
4. If this check is completed successfully, the software will proceed without interruption;
otherwise, a specific operator message will be displayed.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-4


Starting BenchMark

System Calibration Check

Figure 4.4
System
Calibration
Check

Steps to Proceed:

1. BenchMark automatically checks the calibration status of the data acquisition system and the
test computer.
2. The date of the last system calibration (contained in the OWNER Table) is compared to the
current system date. If the interval exceeds the acceptable calibration interval specified for
the system, an advisory notice will be displayed; otherwise, NO notice will be displayed. A
12 month calibration period is recommended but can be as long as 48 months at the
owner’s discretion and risk.
3. If the test system is found to be “out of calibration”, an advisory notice will be presented.
This does not prevent operation of the system. However, it is strongly recommended that the
system be re-calibrated at the earliest opportunity. Contact Black Diamond Engineering
Customer Service for assistance (See Chapter 17).
4. The system will proceed automatically if the test system is within the defined calibration
period.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-5


Starting BenchMark

Transducer Calibration Check

Figure 4.5
Transducer
Calibration
Check

Steps to Proceed:

1. BenchMark automatically checks the calibration status of each transducer registered in the
transducer data table (TRANSCAL).
2. The last calibration date and calibration interval from the TRANSCAL table are compared to
the current system date. If a transducer is determined to be “out of calibration”, the notice
shown above will be displayed with the transducer color, serial number and other pertinent
information displayed. If a transducer is within its acceptable calibration period, NO notice
will be displayed.
2. This is an advisory notice and will not prevent you from operating the system or using the
transducer(s) noted. It is strongly recommended that “out-of-calibration” transducer(s) be
calibrated at the earliest opportunity. Black Diamond Engineering provides calibration
services. Contact Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service for assistance (See Chapter
17).
3. After reading the information displayed, click OK to continue.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-6


Starting BenchMark

Warnings and Cautions

Figure 4.6
Warnings and
Cautions

Steps to Proceed:

1. BenchMark will display very important safety information. Please carefully read, review and
thoroughly understand this information. BenchMark is to be used ONLY in accordance with
all applicable safety procedures. Please refer to Chapter 2, Safety for more information.

2. If you are unsure if it is safe to proceed, click EXIT [E], disconnect BenchMark and consult
Safety or Supervisory personnel.

3. Click CONTINUE [C] to move to the next window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-7


Starting BenchMark

Main Operations Menu

Figure 4.7
Main
Operations
Menu

Steps to Proceed:

1. This window is the focus of all BenchMark operations. Each of the twelve (12) command
keys shown is discussed in detail in a separate chapter in this manual.
2. To begin testing using the BenchMark, click on LOCATE RECORD [L], the upper left-hand
command key. This function, which identifies the current valve record, is described in detail
in Chapter 5, Locate Record. Most other command keys are active only when there is a
current valve record. Database Tools and Configure System command keys are always active.
3. Click on the appropriate command key or enter the short-cut keystroke indicated to proceed
with the desired function or click on EXIT [E] to end your BenchMark session.
4. The symbol in the lower right portion of the screen indicates the Current System Units: a US
flag symbol for US (lbs, in) units and a “SI” symbol for System International units (N, m).

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 4-8


5
Locate Record

Page
Overview 5-1
New or Existing Record Option 5-2
Changing Data / Graph File Storage Path 5-3
Changing Menu, Catalog and Std. Rules Path 5-4
Selecting Paths Based on the Customer 5-5
Automatic Windows™ Path Creation 5-6
Locate Existing Record 5-8
Record Entry / Selection by Work List 5-11
Find Lost Records 5-15
Find Lost Records by THistory Table 5-16
Find Lost Records by ID Information 5-17
Find Lost Records by Test Date 5-18
Find Lost Records by Graph Filename 5-19
Locate Records

Overview
BenchMark 5.0 valve identification, configuration, application, and test records are all recorded
on the computer hard drive as entries in data tables. BenchMark 5.0 coordinates and manages
these tables automatically with minimal operator involvement.
To begin testing, a Current Valve Record must be identified or created using the Locate Record
function. Once a valve record has been made current, BenchMark 5.0 has access to all of the
records for that valve contained on the Current Record, Graph File and Information Paths. All
subsequent testing (until a new Current Valve Record is identified) will be registered (logged) to
the current valve.
For the user’s convenience in subsequent searches and uses of the data, BenchMark 5.0 uses the
following full keys in each data table: Tag Number, Manufacturer’s Serial Number and an
Alternate Serial Number. The Alternate Serial Number is often a repair number assigned by a
valve shop or repair contractor. Each of these fields can contain up to fifteen (15) characters
and/or numbers, which provides great flexibility in identifying and coordinating the valve records.
Each valve entered into the BenchMark system is described by an individual record in each of the
following data tables: Valve Identification (VID), Valve Configuration (VCONFIG); Valve Trim
(VTRIM), Valve Positioning System (VPOS), Service (SERVICE), Pipeline and Process (PANDP),
Control (CONTROL) and Materials (MATERIAL).
The Locate Record function accesses the valve records in the Valve Identification (VID) data table,
and allows the operator to select the valve to be tested from the information stored there. This
function is also used to create and coordinate the entry of new valve records. These additional
valve record tables are discussed in detail in the Chapter 6, Valve Configuration Information.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


FIELD: One individual piece of data. It can be Alpha (Characters), Numeric (Numbers, Integer or
Real), Date, Logical (True or False, Yes or No) or Memo (Text). It is sometimes referred to as an
attribute. The Tag Number of a valve is an example of a field.
RECORD: In a data table, a record is a complete unit of related information. Each record is an
electronic file folder containing fields with an immediate relevance to one another. For example,
the valve identification record contains data identifying one individual valve.
DATA TABLE: A group or collection of records that have some underlying relationship with one
another. For example, a Valve Identification Table will have the Identification records for a variety
of valves. All records within a data table have identical format and variable content.
DATABASE: A group or collection of one or more data tables that are relevant to one another
because of the application or purpose of the software. For example, BenchMark coordinates a
number of data tables containing valve records, system records and test results to absolutely
minimize the operator’s clerical work and to maximize the access and usefulness of the data that is
stored by powerful reporting and search tools.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-1


Locate Records

New or Existing Record Option

Figure 5.1
New or
Existing
Record
Option

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 presents an option to create a NEW RECORD [N] or select an EXISTING
RECORD [E] on the current storage data paths. An option to change the current paths,
CHANGE PATHS [P] is also presented. Current paths are shown, disabled and grayed out.
2. If you are entering a valve record for the first time and know that records for the valve do not
yet exist, click NEW RECORD [N] to continue. BenchMark 5.0 will transfer you directly to
the data entry screens where you can enter the necessary valve information.
3. If you are testing a valve that has been tested previously and the valve information is
contained on the current paths or has been loaded there, click EXISTING RECORD [E] to
continue.
4. If you are uncertain whether the valve information records exist, click on EXISTING
RECORD [E] to examine the valve records that are loaded on the current paths and
continue.
5. Click on BACK [B] to quit this function and return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-2


Locate Records

Changing Data / Graph File Storage Path

Figure 5.2
Changing the
Data/Graph
File
Storage Path

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 allows the operator to specify the Windows™ paths used to access and store
Valve Records, Test Records and Graph Files.
2. Click CHANGE PATHS [P] to access the path entry fields. Click the appropriate browse
command to open a folder selection dialog. Use the mouse to point to the new path. Note
that changing a path in this function is temporary and does not change the underlying default
paths set in the System Configuration function (See Chapter 16, Configure System).
3. If Coordinate Path Selection is checked, all paths will be automatically coordinated to the
Records path entered. If appropriate paths do not exist, the operator will be given that
opportunity to create the missing paths and load all required tables.
4. Graph File data stored on the indicated path can be managed automatically or manually by
entering a selection in the System Configuration function (See Chapter 16, Configure System).
If this path is automatically managed, newly created Graph Files are placed in folders
organized by test date; otherwise, future Graph Files will be placed in the path shown.
5. Press APPLY [A] to change current paths to those indicated. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon
changes and close the edit function. Press DEFAULTS [D] to reset the paths to the paths
specified in the System Configuration function (See Chapter 16, Configure System). Path
entries are checked automatically and data tables are placed on the paths as necessary.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-3


Locate Records

Changing Menu, Catalog and Standard Rules Paths

Figure 5.3
Changing the
Menu,
Catalog and
Standard
Rules Paths
Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 allows the specification of the Windows™ paths for valve reference
information contained in the Menu tables, Catalog tables and Standard Rules Tables.
2. Click CHANGE PATHS [P] to access the path entry fields. Click the appropriate browse
command to open a folder selection dialog. Use the mouse to point to the new path. Note
that changing a path in this function is temporary and does not change the underlying default
paths set in the System Configuration function (See Chapter 16, Configure System).
3. Menu and Catalog tables are used to help the operator efficiently and accurately input valve
configuration data. Menu Tables control the content and order of Menu Lists dropped down
for operator selection. Catalog Tables are the source of the valve reference data displayed in
the drop-down grids. After the operator enters the configuration information, BenchMark 5.0
calculates Default Standards for the valve. Standard Rules tables are the source of rules and
parameters used in these calculations. Further information about how these tables are used is
contained in Chapter 6, Valve Configuration Information and Chapter 14, Test Standards.
4. Press APPLY [A] to change current paths to those indicated. Press DEFAULTS [D] to abandon
changes and reset the paths back to current paths. Path entries are checked automatically
and data structures are placed on these paths as necessary. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon
changes and close the edit function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-4


Locate Records

Selecting Paths Based on the Customer

Figure 5.4
Selecting the
Paths Based
on the
Customer

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 can manage all of the necessary information paths and automatically
coordinate them by the customer information shown in Figure 5.4.
2. Click on the desired customer and or customer location in the grid. The record will be
highlighted. Press SELECT [S] to place this customer record into play and make the saved
paths for this customer the current paths. Alternatively, double-click on the desired record to
select it.
3. All information regarding the customer and the corresponding storage locations can be
managed from this window. Press EDIT [E] to update the contents of the Customer Table.
Then press ADD [A] to add a new customer record, or press DELETE [D] to delete an
existing customer record.
4. To change or enter the paths for a customer, click on the Registered Paths tab and browse to
enter the Record path, Graph File path, Menu File path, Catalog path and Standard Rules
path. Press OK [O] to change customer’s paths to those entered or edited. BenchMark 5.0
will automatically check and place all required data structures on these paths without further
operator involvement. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the changes to the customer’s paths
and close the customer path edit function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-5


Locate Records

Automatic Windows™ Path Creation

Figure 5.5
Automatic
Windows™
Path Creation

Steps to Proceed:
1. After a new Customer Table entry, two additional command keys: DEFAULT PATHS [F] and
AUTO CREATE [U], will be visible and enabled.
2. Press DEFAULT PATHS [F] to set the paths for the new customer record equal to the current
system default paths.
3. Press AUTO CREATE [U] to create a customized Windows™ path structure for the currently
selected customer based on the rules established in the System Configuration function (See
Chapter 16, Configure System for more details). The respective paths for the customer are
then recorded in the table shown for future access.
4. In the example shown, the new paths are created using the entry for Customer ID and
Company Name on the default path of C:\0h_0h.
5. Select the customer record to make the newly created paths current.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-6


Locate Records

Automatic Windows™ Path Creation (continued)

Figure 5.6
Example of
Windows™
paths
Created using
Auto Create

Figure 5.6, above, shows an example of a BenchMark data path structure created using the Auto
Create function and the customer record selected in Figure 5.5. BenchMark 5.0 will
automatically create and load these paths with all necessary data structures without any further
operator intervention.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-7


Locate Records

Locate Existing Record

Figure 5.7
Locate
Existing
Record

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 displays a grid of Valve Identification (VID) records contained in the current
data storage path, shown at the top of the window. Two methods of record selection are
offered: drop down list box and direct selection from the data grid.
2. Selection by DROP DOWN List Box:
BenchMark 5.0 allows the operator to search and locate valve records within this table based
on three (3) Selection Criteria: TAG NUMBER; MFG. SERIAL NUMBER; or ALT. SERIAL
NUMBER. Select a criterion by clicking on it. In the example of Figure 5.7, the selection
criterion is TAG NUMBER. The “Select by” List Box is appropriately labeled “Select by TAG
NUMBER” and is loaded with the Tag Numbers contained in the Valve Identification (VID)
data table. You may open the box and select the desired value from the menu list or you
may begin entering the value in the field of the box. As you type in the value, BenchMark
5.0 will automatically search for the record in the list. Click or press Enter to highlight the
record in the data table grid. The Tag Number, Mfg. Serial Number, Alt. Serial Number
and Unit in the Current Record fields will be displayed in the center of the window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-8


Locate Records

Locate Existing Record (continued)

Figure 5.8
Locate
Existing
Record by
Grid
Selection

Steps to Proceed (continued):


Selection by DATA TABLE GRID
1. All Valve Identification records present in the current Data Storage Path are contained in the
various rows of the data grid.
2. Record display order can be modified by using the Group Records By selection. Records can
be grouped by any of the non-key fields contained in the drop down list box in increasing or
decreasing order. In the example shown, records have been grouped by the COMPANY field.
3. Alternatively, press FIRST [F] to move to the first record entered into the Valve Identification
table. Similarly, press LAST [L] to move to the last record entered into the table. Press
PRIOR [P] to move to the record selected the last time that a record was located.
4. Use the scroll bars on the right and bottom of the grid to move through the table and locate
the valve record of interest. Click on the desired record to make it current. (Double Clicking
will select the record and ALSO pressing ACCEPT [A])
5. Once loaded, a record will be highlighted in the data table grid and the Tag Number, Mfg.
Serial Number, Alternate Serial Number and Unit will be shown in the Current Record
fields in the middle of the screen.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-9


Locate Records

Locate Existing Record (continued)

Common Procedure to Continue:

By either method, a current record has now been selected. If ACCEPT [A] is pressed, the record
will be loaded as the Current Valve Record and will remain so until it is changed by the same
record selection procedure or until the BenchMark 5.0 session ends.

If the record is correct based on the Identification information displayed and you are ready to
proceed, click on ACCEPT [A] to continue. Click on CANCEL [C] to abandon the record
selection and return to the Main Menu.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


DATA TABLE GRID: A method of displaying the contents of a data table in a row and column
format where the rows are the individual records of the table and the columns are the fields or
attributes of the record. A grid has a format similar to that of a spreadsheet.

SCROLL BARS: The shaded bars along the right side and bottom of a window. To scroll to another
location in the window, drag the box with the pointer or click on the arrows in the scroll bar.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-10


Locate Records

Record Entry / Selection by Work List

Figure 5.9
Record Entry
Selection by
Work List

Steps to Proceed:
1. Optionally, BenchMark 5.0 links to external information systems by Task Files placed in an
Inbox folder located on the current Record Path.
2. You do not have to use Task Files or the Work List function to productively operate the
BenchMark system.
3. This feature provides external asset management, business system software and other similar
systems a convenient means of communicating valve repair/setup/diagnostic instructions and
valve configuration information to the BenchMark 5.0 program. Detailed information on the
contents and format of Task Files is contained in Appendix F, Task File Format.
4. Task Files are in the format of a standard Windows™ Private Profile file. This format is also
commonly referred to as “INI” format.
5. BenchMark 5.0 does not produce Task List files. They can be produced by: BenchMark Data
MGR 5.0; owner supplied asset manager; business management systems; or other PC
software tools.
6. Press WORK LIST [W] to examine the contents of the current Record Path folder “Inbox” to
determine if any Task Files are present.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-11


Locate Records

Record Entry / Selection by Work List (continued)

Figure 5.10
Work List
Table

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 examines the contents of the Inbox located on the current Record Path for all
files containing the file suffix “.tsk”.
2. Each such Task File located is opened and registered to a temporary table displayed to the
operator. Tag Number, Manufacturer’s Serial Number, Alternate Serial Number, Work Order
Number, Issue Date, Instructions and Record Path are displayed for review.
3. Use the vertical scroll bar or the arrows of the data control located at the bottom of the
window to examine the contents of the Work List Table. Instructions for each record are
contained in the text box labeled “Test / Repair Instructions for this Valve”.
4. Select a Work List item to be completed: Double click on the item of interest or click to
highlight and press SELECT [S]. If the valve record already exists in the BenchMark 5.0 tables
located on the Current Record Path, the record will be selected and, by operator
confirmation, be made the Current Record. If the record does not exist, BenchMark 5.0 will
attempt to load Valve Identification, Configuration, Trim and Positioning System fields from the
contents of the selected Task List File. The operator will be requested to confirm the entries.
5. Press CLEAR [C] following completion of the requested tasks, to disable active Task files by
converting them to a “.dne” (done) suffix.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-12


Locate Records

Record Entry / Selection by Work List (continued)

Figure 5.11
Work List
Record
Confirmation

Steps to Proceed:
1. If the valve selected in the previous window (Figure 5.10 Work List Table), already exists in
the Current Record Path, the window shown in Figure 5.11, above, will be displayed. The
appropriate Valve Identification record will have been located and highlighted.
2. Review the record to determine if it is correct. If so, press ACCEPT [A] to accept the selection
and make the record the Current Valve Record.
3. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon this window and return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-13


Locate Records

Record Entry / Selection by Work List (continued)

Figure 5.12
Work List
Record Load
Confirmation

Steps to Proceed:
1. If the valve selected in Figure 5.10, Work List Table, does not exist as a record in the Current
Record path, BenchMark 5.0 will open the Valve Configuration Window, create a new valve
record and load the data into the record from the corresponding fields in the Task File.
2. The notice shown above in Figure 5.12 is displayed. Press OK [O] to clear the message.
3. Review the imported contents of the record to determine if the data accurately describes the
valve to be tested.
4. Instructions from the Task File are automatically placed into the ID Notes field to archive
them with the record.
5. Press SAVE [S] to accept the entries, create this record and make this valve the Current Valve
Record.
6. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon this record entry and return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-14


Locate Records

Find Lost Records

Figure 5.13
Find Lost
Records –
Initial Path

Steps to Proceed:
1. At times, it is necessary to locate “lost”, or more correctly described “misplaced”, test data.
Data paths and files are sometimes unintentionally moved or can be scattered due to a
poorly conceived data management strategy or unconventional nomenclature. BenchMark
5.0 provides a powerful, fast software tool to assist you in locating and loading the correct
records.
2. Refer to Figure 5.1, press Find Lost Records to open the File Locator dialog.
3. Browse to select the starting or initial path to search. Searching can be confined to a specific
path, include all of the sub-folders of the path or encompass an entire drive.
4. Select Include Sub-Directories to search the sub-folders of the specified initial path.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-15


Locate Records

Find Lost Records by THistory Table

Figure 5.14
Find Lost
Records by
THistory
Table

Steps to Proceed:
1. The example of Figure 5.14 demonstrates an effective way of locating BenchMark data on
the current computer.
2. The Filename / Type search method has been selected and a key BenchMark table,
THistory.dbf, has been selected. THistory is the test history log of the BenchMark system and
is present wherever BenchMark data records are stored.
3. Press SEARCH [S] to examine the current computer beginning with the Initial Search Path
and including sub-directories, if Include Sub-Directories is selected.
4. In the example of Figure 5.14, matching records were located in thirteen (13) paths.
5. Click to select the desired path from those presented and press LOADPATH [L] to load this
into the Locate Record function as the current data path. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the
File Locator function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-16


Locate Records

Find Lost Records by ID Information

Figure 5.15
Find Lost
Records by
ID
Information

Steps to Proceed:
1. The example of Figure 5.15 demonstrates an effective way of locating BenchMark data on
the current computer where partial valve identification information is known.
2. The Record Containing search method has been selected and a valve Tag Number, 21-FV-
139, has been entered into one of the search criteria fields.
3. Press SEARCH [S] to examine the current computer beginning with the Initial Search Path
and including sub-directories if Include Sub-Directories is selected.
4. In the example of Figure 5.15, matching records were located in two (2) paths.
5. Click to select the desired path from those presented and press LOADPATH [L] to load this
into the Locate Record function as the current data path. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the
File Locator function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-17


Locate Records

Find Lost Records by Test Date

Figure 5.16
Find Lost
Records by
Test Date

Steps to Proceed:
1. The example of Figure 5.16 demonstrates an effective way of locating BenchMark data on
the current computer where the test date or test date interval is known.
2. The Record Containing search method has been selected and Test Date Between has been
selected. A thirty-six (36) month interval ranging from 12-31-1996 to 12-31-1999 has been
entered.
3. Press SEARCH [S] to examine the current computer beginning with the Initial Search Path
and including sub-directories, if Include Sub-Directories is selected.
4. In the example of Figure 5.16, matching records were located in five (5) paths.
5. Click to select the desired path from those presented and press LOADPATH [L] to load this
into the Locate Record function as the current data path. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the
File Locator function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-18


Locate Records

Find Lost Records by Graph Filename

Figure 5.17
Find Lost
Records by
Graph
Filename

Steps to Proceed:
1. The example of Figure 5.17 demonstrates an effective way of locating BenchMark graph file,
if the filename is known.
2. The Graph file Name search method has been selected and the graph file name
B70012ab.dat has been entered. If the file suffix is omitted, the search presumes a “.dat”
suffix.
3. Press SEARCH [S] to examine the current computer beginning with the Initial Search Path
and including sub-directories, if Include Sub-Directories is selected.
4. In the example of Figure 5.17, matching records were located in two (2) paths.
5. Click to select the desired path from those presented and press LOADPATH [L] load this into
the Locate Record function as the current data path. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the File
Locator function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 5-19


6
Valve Configuration

Page

Overview 6-1
Identification – New Record 6-2
Identification – Existing Record 6-3
Configuration 6-4
Trim (Seat) 6-7
Actuator 6-8
Positioning System – General Overview 6-11
Positioning System – I/P Signal Source 6-12
Positioning System – P/P Signal Source 6-13
Positioning System – I/P Direct Signal Source 6-14
Positioning System – Digital Signal Source 6-15
Positioning System – Hart Signal Source 6-16
Export Record 6-17
Note Entry 6-18
Valve Configuration

Overview
BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ provides a powerful means to consolidate and manage
valve configuration information. In the Valve Configuration function, BenchMark 5.0 presents five
tab folders each linked to an individual data table: Valve Identification (VID), Valve Configuration
(VCONFIG), Valve Trim (VTRIM) and Valve Positioning System (VPOS), respectively. This intuitive
folder format allows entry, review and editing of all record fields. Whenever possible field data is
entered by Drop-Down Menu Lists and Drop-Down Data Grids to minimize data entry time and
eliminate spelling and nomenclature errors. Additionally, all text entry fields are automatically
converted to uppercase text to minimize entry variation.
Before editing an existing record, the operator must first click on the EDIT [E] command. This
helps to prevent accidental changes to the data record. All entry fields are clearly and uniquely
labeled. See Chapter 18, Glossary, for the definition of entry field terms.
If the new valve record is similar to the previous Current Valve Record you may elect to click on
COPY PREVIOUS [P]. All of the previous record fields will be copied to the new record with the
exception of Tag Number, Mfgr. Serial Number and Alternate Serial Number. This saves entry time
when a series of test valves are nearly identical.
Mandatory Entry: Fields with the light blue/green back-color are required and must be
completed before the record can be saved. These fields represent the minimum information
needed to test the valve and manage the valve information. Of course, the more information
placed into the valve record, the easier it will be to understand the valve’s condition and develop
performance trends using subsequent database searches.
Drop-Down Menu Lists: The Configuration function uses “drop-down” lists to assist the operator
in selecting and entering correct information for the valve. List content and item order are
completely and easily customizable. The current Menu File is the source of the list contents (See
Chapter 5, Locate Record and Chapter 16, Configure System). Each Menu File is a dBase IV™
format data table that can be edited using the tools contained in the Database Tools function (see
Chapter 15, Database Tools) or by many readily available PC based spreadsheet or data base
applications. See Appendix “C”, Custom Configuration Menus, for more details.
Drop-Down Grids: The Configuration function uses command keys that when pressed, display
“drop-down” grids. These grids help in selecting and entering correct information for the valve.
Grid content is completely and easily customizable. The current Catalog Path is the source for
the catalog tables (See Chapter 5, Locate Record and Chapter 16, Configure System). The
following Catalog Tables: ACTUATOR, CV, FRICTION and SPRINGS are all dBase IV™ format
and can be edited and maintained using the tools contained in the Database Tools function (see
Chapter 15, Database Tools) or by many readily available PC based spreadsheet or data base
applications. This format is also readily importable by information management systems. See
Appendix “B”, Summary of Data Tables, for more details.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-1


Valve Configuration

Identification – New Record

Figure 6.1
Identification
- New Record

Steps to Proceed:
1. The first of the five folder tabs is Identification. When a new record is being created, EDIT
[E] is automatically enabled by BenchMark 5.0. COPY PREVIOUS [P] is also enabled. Entry
fields are blank and the cursor is located in the Tag Number Field. This field and the other
light-blue background fields must be completed before the record can be saved. All other
fields are optional. All field terms are defined in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the new record is very similar to the previous Current Valve Record you may elect to click
COPY PREVIOUS [P]. All fields for the previous record except Tag Number, Mfgr. Serial
Number and Alt. Serial Number will be copied to the new valve record.
3. Enter characters and / or numbers into the fields as appropriate. Tab and Enter keys
automatically advance you to the next field. BenchMark 5.0 automatically converts all text to
uppercase to facilitate later data table searches.
4. Notes or comments related to the Valve Identification can be entered by pressing the ID
NOTES [N] key. Clear comprehensive notes are important in tracking the repair history of
the valve.
5. Click on the next folder tab to continue valve record entry.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-2


Valve Configuration

Identification – Existing Record

Figure 6.2
Identification-
Existing
Record

Steps to Proceed:
1. The first of the five folder tabs, Identification, is displayed. Operator must first click on EDIT
[E] before the cursor can edit or enter values into the fields. Enter characters and / or
numbers into the fields as appropriate. Tab and Enter keys advance you to the next field.
BenchMark 5.0 converts all text to uppercase to facilitate later data table searches.
2. Click on CLEAR ALL [A] to clear all existing entries to the entry fields.
3. Notes or comments related to the Valve Identification can be entered by pressing the ID
NOTES [N] key. Clear, detailed notes are important in tracking the repair history of the
valve. An example of data entry is described later in this chapter.
4. Click on the next folder tab to continue valve record entry or SAVE [S] to make the
modifications permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes.
5. To facilitate communications with other computer programs and data management systems,
BenchMark 5.0 includes an export function for the Valve Configuration records. Press
EXPORT [X] to export the contents of all five folders. The Export function is discussed in
more detail later in this chapter.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-3


Valve Configuration

Configuration

Figure 6.3
Configuration

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 displays the fields of table VCONFIG containing valve manufacturer, body
style, model, size, packing and other non-trim (seat), non-positioning system aspects of the
test valve. All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. The valve Configuration (Linear or Rotary), is the only mandatory entry field in this folder as
indicated by the light-blue/green back-color. Entry to the Configuration field is restricted to
LINEAR or ROTARY. All other entry fields are optional.
3. Notes or comments related to the Valve Identification can be entered by pressing the CFG
NOTES [N] key. Clear, detailed notes are important in tracking the repair history of the valve.
4. Click the Configuration Table command to display a grid containing frequently entered
valve configurations.
5. Click the Add to Table command to add the current folder entries as a record in the
Configuration Catalog table. Operator will be advised if the record already exists in the table.
6. Click the Packings Catalog command and a grid will be displayed containing packing and
friction data from the Friction Catalog table.
7. Click on the next folder tab to continue entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries / modifications
permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon all entries / modifications.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-4


Valve Configuration

Configuration (continued)

Figure 6.4
Configuration
Catalog

Steps to Proceed:
8. Pressing the Configuration Table command (shown in Figure 6.3) results in the display of the
Configuration Catalog, which contains frequently entered valve configurations and is
managed by the Operator.
9. Selecting Highlight Alternate Rows will highlight the rows of the table with an alternating
color to facilitate reading the records.
10. Review the records of this table and click to select the desired valve configuration. Press
SELECT [S] to load the data contained in the currently selected record to the Configuration
folder fields. Alternatively, click CANCEL [C] to abandon any record selection and return to
the Configuration folder.
11. Selection results in the following entry fields being loaded:
Configuration folder: Manufacturer, Valve Type, Valve Model, Pressure Class, Flow Direction
and Body Size.
Trim(Seat) folder: Seat Diameter, Seat Alpha Designation, Rated Flow Cv, Flow
Characteristic and Pressure Balance Configuration.
Actuator folder: Nominal Stroke.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-5


Valve Configuration

Configuration (continued)

Figure 6.5
Packings
Catalog

Steps to Proceed:
12. Pressing the Packings Catalog command (shown in Figure 6.3) results in the display of the
Packings Catalog, which contains data describing stem and shaft packing configurations,
types, materials and estimated friction. The content of this catalog table can be managed by
the software tools available in the Database Tools function (Chapter 15, Database Tools).
13. BenchMark 5.0 will automatically load only packings appropriate for the current valve
configuration: Linear or Rotary.
14. Selecting Highlight Alternate Rows will highlight the rows of the table with an alternating
color to facilitate reading the records.
15. Review the records of this table and click to select the desired packing configuration, type
and material. Press SELECT [S] to load the data contained in the currently selected record to
corresponding Configuration folder fields. Alternatively, click CANCEL [C] to abandon any
record selection and return to the Configuration folder.
16. Selection results in the following entry fields being loaded:
Configuration folder: Packing Type, Packing Material, Stem Diameter, Estimated
Friction/Torque.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-6


Valve Configuration

Trim (Seat)

Figure 6.6
Trim(Seat)

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 displays the fields of data table VTRIM containing valve seat and plug data.
On an existing record, the operator is required to click on EDIT [E] before fields can be
edited or entered. This prevents accidental alteration of the record during review. All field
terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. The valve Seat (Trim) Diameter is the only mandatory field entry on this folder as indicated
by the light blue/green back-color. The entry is used to evaluate the loads applied to the seat
during shut-off. All other fields are optional. The operator is encouraged to enter as much
data as practical and available to assist later analyses of the results and database.
3. Click on the next folder tab to continue valve record entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries /
modifications permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon the entry / modifications made to the
data tables.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-7


Valve Configuration

Actuator

Figure 6.7
Actuator

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 displays select fields from the VPOS data table describing the valve actuator.
All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. Mandatory entry fields, indicated by the light blue/green background color, vary by Actuator
Style. These entries are necessary for the proper evaluation of the valve’s condition. All other
fields are optional.
3. The valve Actuator Style, Air Action, Fail Mode and Nominal Stroke, are required entries
for either Single Acting or Double Acting actuators. Diaphragm Effective Area, Bench set
Minimum and Bench set Maximum are required entries when the valve actuator is single
acting. Top Cylinder Area and Bottom Cylinder Area are similarly required field entries
when the valve actuator is double acting.
4. Click ACTUATOR CATALOG [A] and a grid will be displayed containing actuator data from
the ACTUATOR table. Select the appropriate data record and click to load the grid data to
the appropriate fields or press the ESC key to return to the Configuration folder.
5. Click SPRING CATALOG [G] and a grid will be displayed containing actuator spring data
from the SPRINGS table. Select the appropriate data record and click to load the grid data to
the appropriate fields or press the ESC key to return to the Configuration folder.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-8


Valve Configuration

Actuator (continued)

Figure 6.8
Actuator
Catalog

Steps to Proceed:
6. Pressing the ACTUATOR CATALOG [A] command (shown in Figure 6.7) results in the
display of the Actuator Catalog, which contains data describing actuator areas for different
manufacturers, actuator styles and models. The content of this catalog table can be managed
by the software tools available in the Database Tools function (Chapter 15, Database Tools).
7. BenchMark 5.0 will automatically load only actuator records appropriate for the current
valve actuator style: Single-Acting or Double-Acting.
8. Selecting Highlight Alternate Rows will highlight the rows of the table with an alternating
color to facilitate reading the records.
9. Review the records of this table and click to select the desired actuator. Press SELECT [S] to
load the data contained in the currently selected record to the corresponding Actuator folder
fields. Alternatively, click CANCEL [C] to abandon any record selection and return to the
Actuator folder.
10. Selection results in the following entry fields being loaded:
Actuator folder: Manufacturer, Model, Diaphragm Effective Area (Single-Acting), Top
Cylinder Area (Double-Acting) and Bottom Cylinder Area (Double-Acting).

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-9


Valve Configuration

Actuator (continued)

Figure 6.9
Spring
Catalog

Steps to Proceed:
11. Pressing the SPRING CATALOG [G] command (shown in Figure 6.7) results in the display of
the Spring Catalog, which contains data describing actuator springs for different
manufacturers, models, designs and maximum strokes. The content of this catalog table can
be managed by the software tools available in the Database Tools function (Chapter 15,
Database Tools).
12. BenchMark 5.0 will automatically load only actuator records appropriate for the current
valve actuator style: Single-Acting or Double-Acting.
13. Selecting Highlight Alternate Rows will highlight the rows of the table with an alternating
color to facilitate reading the records.
14. Review the records of this table and click to select the desired actuator spring. Press SELECT
[S] to load the data contained in the currently selected record to corresponding Actuator
folder fields. Alternatively, click CANCEL [C] to abandon any record selection and return to
the Actuator folder.
15. Selection, results in the following entry field being loaded:
Actuator folder: Spring Rate.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-10


Valve Configuration

Positioning System – General Overview

Figure 6.10
Positioning
System,
General
Overview

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark Data MGR™ displays select fields from the VPOS data table describing the valve
positioning system. All field terms are contained in Chapter 12, Glossary.
2. The Signal Range menu list contains both Current Signal Ranges and Pressure Signal Ranges.
BenchMark Data MGR™ allows the entry of signal ranges not already contained in the menu
list. If possible, select a range from the list to minimize the chance for error. Otherwise,
carefully follow the entry list format when entering a non-list range.
3. Mandatory entry fields, indicated by the light blue/green background color, vary by the type
of Signal Range entered. These entries are necessary for the proper evaluation of the valve’s
condition. All other fields are optional. The valve Signal Range and Signal Source are
required entries regardless of the type of Signal Range entered.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-11


Valve Configuration

Positioning System – I/P Signal Source

Figure 6.11
I/P Signal
Range

Steps to Proceed:
1. I/P Signal Source: If the valve tested normally employs an I/P transducer, select or enter the
appropriate current Signal Range (mA).
2. Using the drop down menu box next to Signal Source, select the identifying model or
identification number for the appropriate I/P transducer.
3. Postioner Model: If desired, select from the list provided, the model or identification number
of the positioner being used.
4. I/P Nominal, Minimum and I/P Nominal, Maximum become mandatory entry fields. Default
entries will be placed in these fields when a Current Signal is selected or enter the
appropriate values.
5. Click on the next folder tab to continue entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries / modifications
permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon all entries / modifications.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-12


Valve Configuration

Positioning System – P/P Signal Source

Figure 6.12
P/P Signal
Range

Steps to Proceed:
1. P/P Signal Source: Consider Figure 5.11. If the valve to be tested normally relies on a
pressure signal from a controller or other source and does not employ an I/P Transducer,
select or enter a Pressure Signal Range (psi or kPa).
2. Upon selection of a Pressure Signal Range the Signal Source is automatically changed to “P/P”
indicating that the valve is a P/P device and the I/P Nominal Min. and I/P Nominal Max. fields
are cleared, disabled and are no longer mandatory entries.
3. BenchMark Data MGR™ requires an I/P device to convert the electronic current analog
output of the test system to a pressure signal for input to a P/P valve. The BenchMark Data
MGR™ operator must provide this I/P transducer test and register the nominal output range
using the Configure System function (See Chapter 16, Configure System).
4. Caution! Failure to correctly register the output range of the testing I/P transducer can
result in erroneous data
5. Click on the next folder tab to continue entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries / modifications
permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon all entries / modifications.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-13


Valve Configuration

Positioning System – I/P Direct Signal Source

Figure 6.13
I/P Direct
Signal Source

Steps to Proceed:
1. I/P Direct Signal Source: If the valve being tested does not use a positioner and normally
employs an I/P transducer directly connected to the valve actuator, follow these procedures.
2. Select or enter the appropriate current Signal Range (mA).
3. Using the drop down menu box next to Signal Source, select the identifying model or
identification number for the appropriate I/P transducer.
4. Select I/P DIRECT as the Positioner Model.
5. I/P Nominal, Minimum and I/P Nominal, Maximum become mandatory entry fields. Default
entries will be placed in these fields when a Current Signal is selected or enter the
appropriate values.
6. Click on the next folder tab to continue entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries / modifications
permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon all entries / modifications.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-14


Valve Configuration

Positioning System – Digital Signal Source

Figure 6.14
Digital Signal
Source

Steps to Proceed:
1. Digital Signal Source: BenchMark currently supports the testing of valves with digital
positioners communicating with the fieldbus protocol. Use the following procedures.
2. Select DIGITAL using the drop down menu box for the Signal Range entry field.
3. Select FIELDBUS as the Signal Source
4. Positioner Model: If desired, select from the list provided, the model or identification number
of the positioner being used.
5. The I/P Nominal Minimum and I/P Nominal, Maximum fields are disabled and cleared.
6. Click on the next folder tab to continue entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries / modifications
permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon all entries / modifications.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-15


Valve Configuration

Positioning System – Hart Signal Source

Figure 6.15
Hart Signal
Source

Steps to Proceed:
1. Hart Signal Source: BenchMark currently supports the testing of valves with positioners
communicating with the Hart protocol. An analog control signal is applied to these valves for
testing. Follow these procedures.
2. Select or enter the appropriate current Signal Range (mA).
3. Using the drop down menu box next to Signal Source, select the identifying model or
identification number for the appropriate I/P transducer.
4. Postioner Model: If desired, select from the list provided, the model or identification number
of the positioner being used.
5. I/P Nominal, Minimum and I/P Nominal, Maximum become mandatory entry fields. Default
entries will be placed in these fields when a Current Signal is selected or enter the
appropriate values.
6. Click on the next folder tab to continue entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries / modifications
permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon all entries / modifications.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-16


Valve Configuration

Export Record

Figure 6.16
Export
Record

Steps to Proceed:
1. To facilitate communications with other computer programs, data management systems and
plant information systems, BenchMark 5.0 includes an export function for the Valve
Configuration records.
2. Press EXPORT [X] to export the contents of all five folders. By default the export file is placed
on the current Record path in a sub-directory labeled “Outbox”. However, the operator has
the option of directing the file storage location.
3. Files can be exported in either of two formats:
[Current Tag Number] + .xct Tab Delimited Format
[Current Tag Number] + .xci Windows™ Profile File (INI) Format
4. Tab Delimited files will export directly into spreadsheet or similar Windows™ applications.
5. Profile Files (INI) are well suited for externally exchanging data between separate computer
programs and are included as an interim storage location for communicating between
information management systems. See Appendix “F” for a more detailed discussion of the
structure of the BenchMark 5.0 Export File structures.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-17


Valve Configuration

Note Entry

Figure 6.17
Note Entry

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 provides separate note fields linked to the Configuration tables: Identification
(VID), Configuration (VCONFIG), Trim (Seat) (VTRIM) and Actuator/Positioner (VPOS).
2. Notes provide a non-structured means of entering data about the valve, valve repairs,
component and configuration changes. Of course, the more information placed into the
valve record, the easier it will be to understand the valve’s condition and develop
performance trends using subsequent database searches.
3. Press ID NOTES [N] when the Identification folder is displayed to enter notes regarding the
identification and location of the valve.
4. Press CFG. NOTES [N] when the Configuration folder is displayed to enter notes regarding
the configuration of the valve.
5. Press TRIM NOTES [N] when the Trim (Seat) folder is displayed to enter notes regarding the
trim or seat of the valve.
6. Press ACT/POS NOTES [N] when either the Actuator or Positioner folders are displayed to
enter notes regarding the actuator and positioning system of the valve.
7. Press OK [O] to save notes entered or CANCEL [C] to abandon notes and return to the
Configuration function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 6-18


Valve Application

Pipeline

Figure 7.3
Pipeline

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on the Pipeline tab to display select fields from the data table PANDP which describes
the pipeline installation details, installation orientation, seat leak classification, hazardous
area classification, maximum temperature and pressure ratings for the current valve. All field
labels are defined in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. There are no mandatory entry fields on this folder. All fields are optional. The operator is
encouraged to enter as much data as practical and possible to assist later analyses of the
results and database.
3. Engineering units in this function are entered and managed by the operator and are not
modified by the selection of US or SI units for the BenchMark 5.0 test system.
4. Notes or comments related to the Pipeline Installation can be entered by pressing the P/P
NOTES [N] command. Notes entry is discussed in further detail in a later section of this
chapter.
5. Click on the next folder tab to continue valve record entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries /
modifications permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon the entry / modifications made to the
valve application data tables.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 7-4


Valve Application

Process

Figure 7.4
Process

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on the Process tab to display select fields from the data table PANDP which describes
the process media for the current valve. All field labels are defined in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. There are no mandatory entry fields on this folder. All fields are optional. The operator is
encouraged to enter as much data as practical and possible to assist later analyses of the
results and database.
3. Engineering units in this function are entered and managed by the operator and are not
modified by the selection of US or SI units for the BenchMark 5.0 test system.
4. Notes or comments related to the Process Media can be entered by pressing the P/P NOTES
[N] command. Notes entry is discussed in further detail in a later section of this chapter.
5. Click on the next folder tab to continue valve record entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries /
modifications permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon the entry / modifications made to the
valve application data tables.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 7-5


Valve Application

Control Loop

Figure 7.5
Control Loop

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on the Control Loop tab to display fields from the data table CONTROL which
describes the control expectations for the current valve. All field labels are defined in Chapter
18, Glossary.
2. There are no mandatory entry fields on this folder. All fields are optional. The operator is
encouraged to enter as much data as practical and possible to assist later analyses of the
results and database.
3. Engineering units in this function are entered and managed by the operator and are not
modified by the selection of US or SI units for the BenchMark 5.0 test system.
4. Notes or comments related to the Control Loop can be entered by pressing the LOOP
NOTES [N] command. Notes entry is discussed in further detail in a later section of this
chapter
5. Click on the next folder tab to continue valve record entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries /
modifications permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon the entry / modifications made to the
valve application data tables.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 7-6


Valve Application

Materials

Figure 7.6
Materials

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on the Materials tab to display fields from the data table MATERIAL which describes
the control expectations for the current valve. All field labels are defined in Chapter 18,
Glossary.
2. There are no mandatory entry fields on this folder. All fields are optional. The operator is
encouraged to enter as much data as practical and possible to assist later analyses of the
results and database.
3. Engineering units in this function are entered and managed by the operator and are not
modified by the selection of US or SI units for the BenchMark 5.0 test system.
4. Notes or comments related to the valve Materials can be entered by pressing the MATERIAL
NOTES [N] command. Notes entry is discussed in further detail in a later section of this
chapter.
5. Click on the next folder tab to continue valve record entry or SAVE [S] to make the entries /
modifications permanent or CANCEL [C] to abandon the entry / modifications made to the
valve application data tables.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 7-7


Valve Application

Export Record

Figure 7.7
Export
Record

Steps to Proceed:
1. To facilitate communications with other computer programs, data management systems and
plant information systems, BenchMark 5.0 includes an export function for the Valve
Application records.
2. Press EXPORT [X] to export the contents of the five folders. Images are not included in the
export function. By default the export file is placed on the current Record path in a sub-
directory labeled “Outbox”. However, the operator has the option of directing the file
storage location.
3. Files can be exported in either of two formats:
[Current Tag Number] + .xat Tab Delimited Format
[Current Tag Number] + .xai Windows™ Profile File (INI) Format
4. Tab Delimited files will export directly into spreadsheet or similar Windows™ applications.
5. Profile Files (INI) are well suited for externally exchanging data between separate computer
programs and are included as an interim storage location for communicating between
information management systems. See Appendix “F” for a more detailed discussion of the
structure of the BenchMark 5.0 Export File structures.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 7-8


Valve Application

Note Entry

Figure 7.8
Note Entry

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 provides note fields linked to the Application tables: Service Conditions
(SERVICE), Pipeline / Process (PANDP), Control Loop (CONTROL) and Materials (MATERIAL).
2. Notes provide a non-structured means of entering data about the valve, valve repairs,
component and configuration changes. Of course, the more information placed into the
valve record, the easier it will be to understand the valve’s condition and develop
performance trends using subsequent database searches.
3. Press SERVICE NOTES [N] when the Service Conditions folder is displayed to enter notes
regarding the service environment of the current valve.
4. Press P/P NOTES [N] when the Pipeline or Process folder is displayed to enter notes
regarding the pipeline installation or the process media controlled by the valve.
5. Press LOOP NOTES [N] when the Control Loop folder is displayed to enter notes regarding
the control use and expectations of the valve.
6. Press MATERIAL NOTES [N] when the Materials folder is displayed to enter notes regarding
the materials used in critical components of the valve.
7. Press OK [O] to save notes entered or CANCEL [C] to abandon notes and return to the
Configuration function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 7-9


8
Report Tools

Page
Overview 8-1
Automatic Report Generator 8-2
Report Element Preview 8-4
Specific Test Recall 8-5
SmartPath Searching 8-6
PDF Report Preparation 8-7
PDF Viewer 8-9
Transfer Selected Records 8-10
Report Tools

Overview
Once a valve record has been located, this function can access all Configuration Data,
Application Data and Test Results for the Current Valve available on the Current Record path.
Using this step you can automatically print a standard test report with customized content,
preview, print and export individual components from the report, and recall complete test
results as originally displayed at the end of testing.
Standard Test Report
The maintenance staff needs quick (over-night or sooner), clear and accurate test reports to make
timely decisions on valve removal and repair. Additionally, each customer or end-user has unique
quality and maintenance documentation requirements. With BenchMark 5.0, the operator can select
from twenty-three (23) standard report elements to quickly prepare concise, professional reports that
meet the customer’s information needs in the desired format, volume and detail. Since the system is
operating in the Windows™ environment, BenchMark 5.0 can communicate with any system printer.
Report Preview:
Each element in the report can be previewed exactly as it will be printed or exported. The report
can be reviewed and checked before it is printed, saving valuable time. Export tools allow the
report elements to be exported into many output formats for insertion into reports or analyses
being prepared in other applications.
Recall Specific Tests:
BenchMark 5.0 manages data storage and the retrieval automatically. By selecting the desired test
from the Test History (THISTORY) data table presented, the operator can display the test results
exactly as they were displayed at the end of the test with all of the same functionality.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


EXPORT: The ability to move data from one application easily and conveniently to another. The
format translation is handled automatically by the current computer program.

TEST HISTORY DATA TABLE: At the conclusion of each test, a record is entered into a data
table, THISTORY, that documents the date, time, operator, data storage location and other data
relevant to the performance of the test. This log is used by BenchMark 5.0 to locate and manage
the test records. It can be reviewed and printed for a particular (filtered) valve in the Report Tools
window and is available for complete review using BenchMark 5.0 database tools (see Chapter 15,
Database Tools).

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-1


Report Tools

Report Generator

Figure 8.1
Report
Generator

Steps to Proceed:
1. A grid is displayed containing all tests completed on the Current Valve grouped by test type
and test date with the last test shown first. Since Last Test is the default Selection Method
option, the latest test completed in each test category is automatically selected. A report
generated with these elements should represent the current state of the valve. Alternatively,
the operator may elect to select the First Test option to select the first test completed in each
testing category. The remaining selection option, Manual, is discussed in the next section.
2. The Standard Report Components tree contains twenty-three report elements; seven valve
identification, configuration and application elements and sixteen test reports and test
graphs. Select All Available from the Report Components Displayed option box at the right of
the function window to show all report elements available for selection. Select Included Only
to show only those report elements selected for the current report.
3. Select the elements to be included in the Standard Report by checking the adjoining box.
Click on SAVE REPORT FORMAT [S] to make the current element selections the default
report format. Click on RESET REPORT FORMAT [R] to return to the last saved format.
4. Click on PRINT REPORT [P] to send the defined elements for the selected tests to the
current system printer. Click on BACK [B] to close this function and return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-2


Report Tools

Report Generator (continued)

Figure 8.2
Report
Generator-
Manual
Select

Steps to Proceed:
5. In Figure 8.2, Manual is selected in the Selection Method option. This enables multiple
selections of tests from the grid.
6. The grid back-color changes to light blue when the selection mode is changed to Manual.
7. PREVIEW SELECTED [V] is disabled in this mode.
8. Move the mouse pointer to the desired test; click to highlight and select that individual test.
With the Shift key depressed, click on the starting and ending records to select blocks of
contiguous test records. Alternatively, click with the Ctrl key depressed to add discrete tests
to the already selected tests.
9. Click on PRINT REPORT [P] to send the defined elements for the manually selected tests to
the current system printer. Click on BACK [B] to close this function and return to the Main
Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-3


Report Tools

Report Element Preview

Figure 8.3
Report
Element
Preview

Steps to Proceed:
1. Double-click on a report element to open a preview window for that report element.
Alternatively, click on a report element and press PREVIEW SELECTED [V].
2. Report elements can be printed, zoomed, enlarged, searched and exported using the
commands available on the preview window.
3. Use the control box X command in the upper right hand corner to close the preview window
and return to the Report Tools function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-4


Report Tools

Specific Test Recall

Figure 8.4
Specific Test
Recall

Steps to Proceed:
1. Refer to Figure 8-1, Automatic Report Generator. The data grid at the top of the form displays
the data table THISTORY filtered for the current valve. Each test performed on the current
valve is a unique record in this data table. Tests are listed alphabetically by test type, and
then chronologically, with latest test first, within each test type. The test type is identified by
a field in the record using the following abbreviations:
BL Baseline
DB Deadband
FR Frequency Response
HDRL Hysteresis + Deadband, Repeatability, and Linearity
RES Resolution
SENS Sensitivity
SR Step Response
SU Step Utility
2. Double click on a selected test record in the data grid to display test results exactly as they
were presented at the conclusion of the original test. All test result screen functions are active.
3. Press CLOSE [C] on the displayed test results screen to return to the Report Tools window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-5


Report Tools

SmartPath Searching

Figure 8.5
Smart Path
Searching

Steps to Proceed:
1. When recreating a test results window, BenchMark 5.0 initially attempts to recover graph file
data from the storage location contained in the stored test record. If unsuccessful, the
THISTORY table is examined for the data storage path logged when the test was originally
performed. If this also proves unsuccessful, BenchMark 5.0 then, if it is enabled in the
SmartPath Searching option (refer to Figure 8.4), employs the SmartPath search function.
2. BenchMark 5.0 automatically maintains a table of successfully used graph file paths and
systematically searches these records attempting to locate graph data for the selected test. If
the Notify option is also checked in the SmartPath Searching option, BenchMark 5.0 will
notify the operator of the location of data found and ask permission to load it. If Notify is not
selected, the first data located for the selected test will be loaded without operator notice.
3. If the search of the SmartPath table is unsuccessful, as shown in the example of Figure 8.5,
the operator will be asked for permission to search the current computer for the test data.
4. SmartPath will locate all instances of the graph data file on the current computer and ask the
operator to select the desired graph data file to load. The SmartPath table will then be
updated with this new path so that subsequent records will be promptly located. SmartPath
table is managed by access date. Paths unused for one year are removed from the table.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-6


Report Tools

PDF Report Preparation

Figure 8.6
PDF Report
Preparation

Steps to Proceed:
1. To use this function, Adobe Acrobat™ Version 5.0 or later must be properly installed on the
current computer. If this application is not present, the commands referred to in this section
will be disabled.
2. Additionally, a PostScript™ printer object must be installed as described in the next section.
3. BenchMark 5.0 uses Adobe Acrobat™ Version 5.0 to produce portable document format
(PDF) standard reports. These reports are compact, easily transmitted electronically and are a
very efficient way to communicate test reports with your customers. Adobe Reader™ is a
very available application used to view the documents. If you are unfamiliar with these
powerful tools, it is recommended that you consult the Adobe Acrobat™ manuals before
using this function.
4. Press the PDF REPORT [D] command to open a PDF Report dialog.
5. The operator identifies a report name and destination path. The current report elements are
then prepared for the currently selected tests and then automatically combined into a multi-
page PDF report ready for viewing or transmitting.
6. The Report Tools function will be resumed at the conclusion of the test record transfer.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-7


Report Tools

PDF Report Preparation (continued)

Figure 8.7
Postscript
Printer
Object
Installation

Steps to Proceed:
7. The following procedures are for reference only.
8. For the BenchMark 5.0 PDF Report function to be enabled and to function properly Adobe
Acrobat™ Version 5.0 or later must be properly installed and a PostScript™ printer object
must be present. You do NOT need to own or physically install a PostScript™ printer to use
this function; only the software driver is required.
9. Follow Microsoft Windows™ procedures for adding a new local printer. Select a PostScript™
printer. Installation of the HP LaserJet™ 4/4M PostScript™ printer object is recommended
but other drivers may work satisfactorily as well. This driver is commonly distributed and is
readily available.
10. Use the Add Port function on the printer properties dialog to direct this printer object to FILE:
(Creates a file on disk).
11. Verify that the Print using the following driver: entry specifies HP LaserJet™ 4/4M PostScript™
or another similar PostScript™ printer driver.
12. Press OK to continue. Exit BenchMark 5.0 normally and re-start the application.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-8


Report Tools

PDF Viewer

Figure 8.8
PDF Viewer

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the VIEW PDF REPORTS [W] command to open a PDF viewer dialog.
2. BenchMark 5.0 will default the browse dialog to a PDF Files path created under the Current
Record Path Outbox path and suggest a report to open for the current valve. The operator
can select and open any PDF file on any logical device available to the current computer.
3. Press OPEN [O] after file selection to launch Adobe Acrobat™ 5.0 and view the selected file.
4. If you are unfamiliar with the versatile and powerful Adobe Acrobat™ 5.0 application, it is
recommended that you consult the Adobe Acrobat™ 5.0 documentation that accompanied
your installation.
5. The Report Tools function will be resumed when the Adobe Acrobat™ viewer is closed.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-9


Report Tools

Transfer Selected Records

Figure 8.9
Transfer
Selected
Records

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the TRANSFER RECORDS [T] command (see Figure 8.1) to open a record transfer
dialog and begin a test record transfer process.
2. This process will transfer all currently selected test records and if needed all associated
identification, configuration, application and performance standards records for the Current
Valve.
3. Select a destination path for the transferred records and press OK. Press Cancel to abandon
the transfer and return to the Report Tools function.
4. If the destination path is an existing BenchMark data path, the currently selected records will
be appended or added to the existing tables. If a matching record exists in the destination
table, the operator will be notified and given the option of overwriting the existing record.
5. If the destination path is not a BenchMark data path, all necessary data table structures will
be placed on the path and the selected records will then be transferred into them.
6. The Report Tools function will be resumed at the conclusion of the test record transfer.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 8-10


9
Calibrate Valve

Page
Overview 9-1
Operator Caution 9-2
Transducer Setup 9-3
Transducer Adjustment 9-4
Referencing Function 9-6
Valve Seat Reference 9-8
Valve Calibration Tool 9-9
Mid-Span Friction Estimate 9-11
FieldBus Network AutoLink 9-12
Control Signal Output [Digital] 9-13
Calibrate Valve

Overview
BenchMark 5.0 helps you verify the correct connection of the pressure and displacement
transducers. It also automatically references the displacement transducer and provides the
operator with a powerful tool to setup / calibrate the control valve. The windows shown and the
procedures described in this section must be completed prior to testing a valve.
Step 1, Transducer Setup: Accurate testing requires that the system transducers be correctly
connected to the computer through the BenchMark 5.0 Interconnect Box. Once the transducers
are correctly attached, testing can proceed. The operator is NOT required to enter any scale
factors, or complicated data acquisition setup information. System setup is handled automatically.

Step 2, Transducer Adjustment: Only the displacement transducer requires adjustment prior to
testing. To ensure that valve travel will occur within the range of the displacement transducer the
transducer must be properly attached and adjusted. BenchMark 5.0 assists the operator in
quickly and easily making this adjustment.

Step 3, Transducer Referencing: BenchMark 5.0 references the mounting location of the
transducer body, (actuator mount or valve body mount) and corrects the scale factor
automatically. Similarly, in rotary valve testing, the displacement transducer can be mounted such
that shaft rotation causes either extension or retraction of the transducer and the scale factor will
be properly handled by the test system.

Step 4, Seat Reference: BenchMark 5.0 detects the seat location and automatically references
the displacement data to that point. Control element displacements are displayed as distance
from the seat.

Valve Calibration Tool:


Formerly, control valve setup and calibration were performed with limited tools such as a “hand
box” or a “pressure gauge and bulb”. Even with a very skilled technician, this is a troublesome
procedure and a source of error and control problems. With BenchMark 5.0, a sophisticated
setup and calibration tool is provided to make the valve setup process more efficient and
accurate. BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ has the capability of establishing an auto link to
a digital valve. Listed below are certain requirements considered necessary to communicate with
a digital valve.

Always follow manufacturer’s recommendations on valve setup for proper valve function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-1


Calibrate Valve

Operator Caution

Figure 9.1
Operator
Caution

Warning ! MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO MOVE THE CONTROL VALVE. IF IT IS NOT
SAFE TO PROCEED, CLICK ON BACK [B], EXIT [E], DISCONNECT THE BENCHMARK
SYSTEM AND CONSULT SAFETY OR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL.

Warning ! THE VALVE CONTROL ELEMENT WILL MOVE WITHOUT PRIOR WARNING
OR NOTICE. TAKE ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL
OR EQUIPMENT.

Steps to Proceed:
1. This screen contains important information regarding the safe operation of the BenchMark
5.0 system. Please carefully read, review and understand the information contained in this
Caution screen.
2. If you are unable or unsure about complying with this information, please disconnect the
BenchMark 5.0 system and consult safety or supervisory personnel before continuing.
3. If it is unsafe to continue, click on BACK [B] to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-2


Calibrate Valve

Transducer Setup

Figure 9.2
Step 1,
Transducer
Connections

Steps to Proceed:
1. Step 1, Verify Transducer Setup: In the BenchMark 5.0 system, transducers are managed by
a unique Color Code. Each transducer is identified by a distinct color band(s) and a printed
label. This step provides an opportunity to verify the current transducer setup for the system.
Transducer setup is easily changed. Refer to Chapter 16, Configure System for further details.
2. Transducer connections are clearly identified by function and color. Transducer descriptions
and connect locations are identical to the BenchMark 5.0 Interconnect Box.
3. For nominal signal currents of 0 to 24 ma connect to Output Signal Connection “A”. For
nominal signal currents of 0 to 60 ma connect to Output Signal Connection “B”.
4. Connect transducers as shown and verify.
5. Click on PROCEED [P] to continue with the setup / calibration procedure or CANCEL [C] to
return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-3


Calibrate Valve

Transducer Adjustment

Figure 9.3
Step 2,
Transducer
Adjustment
Notice
Window

Steps to Proceed:
WARNING! MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO MOVE THE CONTROL VALVE. IF YOU ARE
UNSURE IF IT IS SAFE TO PROCEED, CLICK ON RETURN [R], EXIT [E], DISCONNECT THE
BENCHMARK SYSTEM AND CONSULT SAFETY OR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL.

WARNING! THE DISPLACEMENT TRANSDUCER MUST BE POSITIONED SUCH THAT THE


FULL STROKE OF THE VALVE WILL NOT OVER-EXTEND THE CABLE.

WARNING! CHECK TO MAKE SURE THAT THE RANGE AND MOUNTING ARE CORRECT.
EXTENDING THE TRANSDUCER BEYOND ITS RATED TRAVEL LENGTH WILL DESTROY THE
TRANSDUCER AND VOID THE WARRANTY. DO NOT ALLOW THE TRANSDUCER CABLE TO SNAP
BACK INTO THE HOUSING AS THIS WILL DAMAGE THE TRANSDUCER AND VOID ANY
WARRANTY.

1. After carefully checking the preliminary displacement transducer mounting, click on


PROCEED [P] to continue the setup. The valve will be sent a control signal of 50 % span and
be allowed to stabilize.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-4


Calibrate Valve

Transducer Adjustment (continued)

Figure 9.4
Displacement
Transducer
Adjustment

Steps to Proceed:
1. Step 2, Adjust Transducer Mounting: This screen is displayed after the valve has stabilized
at the 50 % control signal for the current system holdtime. Adjustment of the displacement
transducer in this step helps optimize the transducer range and prevent over-ranging and
subsequent damage to the transducer.
2. Adjust the distance between the Displacement Transducer and Takeoff Arm Connection (See
Chapter 3, Hardware for more details) to bring the colored bar into the Target Range. The
color bar is red when outside the acceptable target range and turns green when within range.
3. When the color bar is within the Target Range and is green, tighten the transducer mounting
and click PROCEED [P] when ready to proceed.

This definition may prove helpful:


HOLDTIME: The time in seconds that the control valve is allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded during a test. This pause ensures that the valve is
finished moving. Set it either automatically or manually. See Chapter 16, Configure System for
more details.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-5


Calibrate Valve

Referencing Function

Figure 9.5
Displacement
Transducer
Reference

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 will automatically reference the Displacement Transducer mounting location
and correct the scale factor automatically. Valve motion is checked to see if it is consistent
with the Air Action (ATO, ATC) entered. If NOT, you will be asked to verify the Air Action
entry (Chapter 6, Configure System) before proceeding. During rotary valve testing, the
Displacement Transducer can be mounted such that shaft rotation causes either extension or
retraction of the transducer and the scale factor will be properly handled by the test system.
2. When ready, click PROCEED [P] to continue with the referencing of the Displacement
Transducer or CANCEL [C] to return to the Main Menu.

This definition may prove helpful:


REFERENCE: To establish the zero or datum position at the seat and to determine the proper
scale factor sign such that displacements away from the seat are positive. All displacements in the
BenchMark 5.0 system are referenced this way to eliminate confusion when displaying the motion
and test results of air to open and air to close valves.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-6


Calibrate Valve

Referencing Function (continued)

Figure 9.6
Displacement
Transducer
Notice

Steps to Proceed:
3. In the event that the valve does not move, or moves only a fraction of the anticipated
motion, the operator will be advised.
4. A list of possible remedial actions is offered. Examine the valve carefully to correct the
functional problem.
5. Press RESTART [R] to begin the setup / calibration procedure at the beginning. Press
CANCEL [C] to abandon the setup / calibration procedure and return to the Main Menu.
6. CAUTION! Press Bypass to skip this setup step and continue. Be advised that bypassing this
step can introduce errors and may cause the system to not record data properly.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-7


Calibrate Valve

Valve Seat Reference

Figure 9.7
Reference to
Valve Seat

Steps to Proceed:
1. Following completion of the Displacement Transducer reference, the notice of Figure 9.7 will
be displayed.
2. Press PROCEED [P] to move the valve plug or disk to seat contact and reference the
BenchMark 5.0 Calibration Tool to that location; then proceed with using the Calibration
function.
3. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the Calibration function and return to the Main Menu without
further valve movement.
4. Press BYPASS [B] to by-skip the Seat Referencing function and proceed directly to using the
Calibration Tool. If the Seat Referencing function is bypassed, displacement data displayed on
the Calibration Tool will not be referenced to the seat.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-8


Calibrate Valve

Valve Calibration Tool

Figure 9.8
Valve
Calibration
Tool

Steps to Proceed: (Control Signal)


1. Five command keys and a slider control are located in the right hand box labeled “Control
Signal”. These controls set the milliamp current signal applied to the valve. The middle three
command keys represent Minimum, Mid-Span (50 %) and Maximum nominal signals for the
current range selected. The keys for the nominal 4-20 ma range shown are: 4, 12 and 20
ma. Alternatively, the keys for a 10-50 ma range would be: 10, 30 and 50 ma, respectively.
2. The top and bottom keys are variables and are set by default to equal the nominal range
endpoint less the acceptable calibration error for the current valve. This allows the operator
to quickly set the valve calibration endpoint by selecting between the two commands. For
example, if the valve is saturated into the seat at 4.00 ma and off the seat when the variable
command is pressed, the valve will lift within the acceptable calibration window. The control
at the right of the variable command is adjustable to any output within the range of the device.
3. The slider control can be set to any value over the output range in use. Click on the arrows
or drag the button to change the slider value.
4. The Control Signal setting is shown graphically in the bar to the left of the command keys.
When the signal is within the nominal range the bar is black. When the control signal
exceeds the nominal maximum the amount in excess is shown on the bar as red. Similarly,
values below the nominal minimum are shown in blue.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-9


Calibrate Valve

Valve Calibration Tool (continued)


Steps to Proceed: (Valve Data)
1. Refer to Figure 9.8, Valve Calibration Tool.
2. The left hand frame labeled, “Control Signal Output”, displays the applied control signal
(milliamps and percent of span).
3. The left hand frame labeled “Transducer Data” displays the data from the transducers
attached to the valve.
4. Double-clicking on any transducer label will present the calibration data for that transducer.
5. Each data element contains an icon representing the color and color symbol for the
transducer currently registered to that channel. To the right of each data field are the units.
6. The configuration shown is for a single acting valve. If a double acting actuator were being
tested the “Valve Data” box composition would change to include a top and bottom cylinder
pressure elements.
7. Data are displayed on the screen as measured and are not being recorded.

Warning ! MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO MOVE THE CONTROL VALVE. IF YOU ARE
UNSURE IF IT IS SAFE TO PROCEED, CLICK ON RETURN, EXIT, DISCONNECT THE
BENCHMARK SYSTEM AND CONSULT SAFETY OR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL.

Common Steps to Proceed:


1. It is important to verify that the valve is moving as expected in response to changes in control
signal. Click on 20 ma (or 50 ma depending on range) and observe the valve. If the valve
does not respond, carefully check the control signal connection to the I/P transducer. If the
problem persists, consult Chapter 17, Troubleshooting.
2. While varying the control signal, check the data displayed from each transducer. If the
values are not correct or are not changing properly in response to the control signal changes,
carefully trace the transducers from the physical connection, to the valve back, to the
Interconnect box and verify proper transducer selection and connection. If the problem
persists consult Chapter 17, Troubleshooting.
3. Clicking RE-ZERO [Z] will zero or reference the position of the displacement data at the
value when the key is clicked. This does not change the overall displacement transducer
reference and only applies to this window.
4. Use the control functions and valve data to setup and calibrate the valve according to the
recommendations of the manufacturer.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-10


Calibrate Valve

Mid-Span Friction Estimate

Figure 9.9
Mid-span
Friction
Estimate

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press FRICTION ESTIMATE [F] to begin a brief automated test sequence that will estimate
the Mid-Span Friction in the valve. This can be used as a quick means of checking and
adjusting the pre-load on the valve packing.
2. The valve will move to a location near mid-span and hold for a short duration. A steadily
increasing control signal is applied to move the valve from approximately 48 to 52 % control
signal. Similarly, a steadily decreasing control signal returns the valve to the initial position.
Actuator pressures and displacement are monitored during this motion and the friction is
calculated.
3. No operator intervention is required.
4. Note that this is an estimate and is not intended to replace the more accurate friction data
obtained in the Baseline test.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-11


Calibrate Valve

Mid-Span Friction Estimate (continued)

Figure 9.10
Mid-Span
Friction
Estimate

Steps to Proceed:
1. At the completion of the automated test cycle, the estimated mid-span friction will be
displayed along with acceptable values for friction, if the PASS/FAIL function (See Chapter 16,
Configure System) is enabled.
2. Note that this is an estimate of valve friction and is not intended to replace the friction data
obtained in the Baseline test.
3. Press CLOSE [C] to return to the Valve Calibration Tool function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-12


Calibrate Valve

FieldBus Network AutoLink

Figure 9.11
BenchMark
FieldBus
AutoLink

Steps to proceed:
1. Verify the National Instruments™ PCMCIA FBUS / 2 card is installed and configured
properly. Connect the output of this card to the digital input of the control valve.

Warning!! THE NORMAL BENCHMARK ANALOG CONTROL SIGNAL IS NOT CONNECTED


WHEN TESTING A DIGITAL VALVE IN THIS MODE.
2. Verify the National Instruments™ NI-FBUS 2.3.6 software application is installed and
configured properly.
3. Verify the signal source of the valve is set to digital through the Configuration menu. For
help with this step, see page 6-11, Valve Configuration, of this manual.
4. Press OPEN SESSION [S] to communicate using a FieldBus network link or press
ANALOG OUTPUT [A] to use one of the analog output signal channels.
5. Select the appropriate interface link and click on Accept. The appropriate link is
dependent upon which socket contains the PCMCIA card. There are two sockets.
6. Select the digital device to be calibrated and click on Accept.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-13


Calibrate Valve

Control Signal Output [Digital]

Figure 9.12
Valve
Calibration
Tool (digital
output)

Steps to proceed:
7. To cancel this process entirely, click on CLOSE SESSION [S]. Otherwise, click on
CONTINUE [C] to continue with the valve calibration tool.
8. The device is accepted and put out of service to perform the calibration. Click on OK.
9. The FieldBus Network Link is successfully established. Click on OK.
10. All further communication to the valve is done through a digital connector on the card.
The normal analog connection is not used when testing in this mode.
11. The following screens will have the same user interface and function as those used to
calibrate an analog valve. To continue with the valve calibration tool, follow the steps
that are given to calibrate an analog valve on pages 9-2 to 9-12, Calibrate Valve, of this
manual.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 9-14


10
Baseline Test

Page

Overview 10-1
Operator Caution 10-2
Baseline Test 10-3
Baseline Test Results 10-4
Baseline Graphs 10-5
Graph Annotation 10-6
Baseline Parameters 10-7
Baseline Test Report 10-9
Baseline Test Notes 10-10
Baseline Test

Overview
The Baseline test is the primary screening test of BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ and is a
valuable tool to assess basic valve setup and performance.
Baseline testing quickly and accurately determines thirty (30) quantitative performance
parameters and compares them to corresponding customer defined performance standards.
Overall valve system, signal transducer, positioner and actuator responses are recorded and
analyzed. Additionally, overall stroking smoothness, seating motion and other valve behaviors can
be qualitatively determined from reviewing the graphical data produced in this test.
The Baseline test consists of a single, linear, micro-stepped calibration cycle of the entire valve
actuator, positioner and transducer system performed at near quasi-static rates (non-dynamic).
Input signals are applied over a range that allows the complete output range of the valve, from
seat to full open, to be observed.
It is important in this type of testing to minimize the pneumatic lag error present. Therefore, it is
important to test the valve at an input signal rate that approaches quasi-static. In this way, valve
control element movement is sufficient to avoid stiction type friction effects, but slow enough that
pneumatic lag error is not significant. The operator can select a Ramp Time of 90, 120, 180, 240,
360, 480 and 600 seconds for each ramp of the calibration cycle.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


CALIBRATION CYCLE: An excursion in input signal applied to a device or system under test that
causes the device or system to produce its full range of output, minimum to maximum and then a
return to minimum output.
HDL: Abbreviation for the error term Hysteresis + Deadband + Lag
HYSTERESIS + DEADBAND: The absolute difference between response values at the same
measurement signal but after approaching from opposite directions, i.e. upscale and downscale
calibration cycles. Since the test involves a reversal of motion, the value inherently contains
DeadBand. The maximum value is reported as a percentage of calibration span, although the
average value warrants examination.
NOMINAL (VALVE) STROKE: Manufacturer’s rated (design) valve stroke or travel.
QUASI-STATIC: A rate of motion so slow that the resulting response is as though a state of full
equilibrium has essentially occurred.
RAMP TIME: Time in seconds required to complete either the increasing or decreasing portion of
a calibration cycle. Test time is approximately twice Ramp Time.
STICTION: Increased friction force resulting from adherence or other mechanisms occurring when
the surfaces in contact are motionless relative to one another. The resulting effect is a drop of
friction force when the two surfaces obtain some relative motion.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-1


Baseline Test

Operator Caution

Figure 10.1
Operator
Caution

Warning ! MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO MOVE THE CONTROL VALVE. IF IT IS NOT
SAFE TO PROCEED, CLICK ON BACK [B], EXIT [E], DISCONNECT THE BENCHMARK
SYSTEM AND CONSULT SAFETY OR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL.

Steps to Proceed:
1. This screen contains important information regarding the safe operation of the BenchMark
5.0 system. Please carefully read, review and understand the information contained in this
Caution screen.
2. If you are unable or unsure about complying with this information, please disconnect the
BenchMark 5.0 system and consult safety or supervisory personnel before continuing.
3. When safe to continue, click on BASELINE TEST [T] to begin testing. Click on BACK [B] to
return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-2


Baseline Test

Baseline Test

Figure 10.2
Baseline Test

Steps to Proceed:
1. Ramp Rate is automatically set by the BenchMark 5.0 system based on actuator type and
size. It can also be set manually just prior to test start and as discussed in Chapter 16,
Configure System. It is important that Ramp Time be long enough that the valve response is
near quasi-static; otherwise, results will be overwhelmed by dynamic effects, particularly
pneumatic lag, and the data will be difficult to interpret or meaningless.
2. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. Testing is automatic from this point.
3. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on the TESTING [T] command
and testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the Main
Menu.
4. Valve Displacement is plotted in real-time as a function of the control signal applied.
BenchMark is not dependent on Windows™ to time the data acquisition function; therefore,
simultaneous use of other Windows™ based applications will not affect the test
5. The Zoom function (See Appendix “A” for more details) can be used to observe valve seating
and other valve movements in real-time.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-3


Baseline Test

Baseline Test Results

Figure 10.3
Baseline Test
Results
Windows

Steps to Proceed:
1. Two windows are displayed at the conclusion of the Baseline test after all data recording and
post-test data processing have been completed. All results have been recorded to the system
computer hard disk before these windows are displayed.
2. BenchMark Baseline Graphs: The left-hand window displays two of the four performance
graphs and can be expanded to display all four graphs by clicking on the button in the upper
right-hand corner of the Baseline Graphs window (approximately mid-screen).
3. BenchMark Baseline Parameters: The right-hand window contains a grid of test parameters,
results and performance standards. This window can be expanded to review the Pass/Fail
performance analysis by clicking on the button in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
4. Six command keys are visible in lower portion of the right-hand window: NOTES [N], to
enter comments into the Test Report and Test Record; REPORT [R], to print a Baseline test
report; GRAPHS [G], to print the Baseline Performance Graphs; DRX [D], to link to
BenchMark Diagnostic Reference™ program and EXPAND [X], to open to the full window.
Click on BACK [B] to return to the MAIN MENU.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-4


Baseline Test

Baseline Graphs

Figure 10.4
Baseline Test
Results -
Graphs

Steps to Proceed:
1. Figure 10.4 shows an expansion of the Baseline Graphs window shown in Figure 10.3.
2. The following graphs are displayed, clockwise beginning in the upper left-hand corner:
Overall Valve Performance, I/P Transducer Performance, Valve Positioner Performance and
Actuator Performance. The first three graphs represent input versus output plots for the
overall valve system and two major sub-systems. The fourth graph is an Actuator Gain Plot
presenting actuator force (pressure multiplied by area) versus the valve motion.
3. Place the mouse cursor anywhere on the colored area surrounding any graph and double-
click or click the right mouse key to launch a graph customization dialog that allows the
operator to enlarge, modify and export the selected graph. Refer to Appendix “A”, Viewing
Graphs, for a complete discussion of the options and controls for customizing, exporting and
manipulating the test graphs.
4. Click on the button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to return to the Baseline
Results window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-5


Baseline Test

Graph Annotation

Figure 10.5
Baseline
Graph
Annotation

Steps to Proceed:
1. Figure 10.5 shows an enlargement of the Actuator Performance Graph shown in Figure 10.3.
2. In the example shown, the Annotation function is activated to indicate the key parameters of
Benchset, Spring Rate and Maximum Travel.
3. The Annotation function is only available for Single-Acting actuators.
4. Click on the title bar of the window or press ESC to return the graph to its regular size.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-6


Baseline Test

Baseline Parameters

Figure 10.6
Baseline
Test Results-
Parameters

Steps to Proceed:
1. Figure 10.6 shows an expansion of the Baseline Parameters window shown in Figure 10.3.
2. The data grid contains thirty (30) key engineering performance parameters for the valve.
3. The following are displayed for each parameter: Result, Units, Status (Pass or Fail), Maximum
Standard, Minimum Standard, Absolute Deviation, Percent Deviation and Comments. These
standards can be enabled or disabled in the Configure System function and are set and
edited in the Test Standards function.
4. Refer to Chapter 16, Configure System and Chapter 14, Test Standards for more details. Refer
to Chapter 18, Glossary for definitions of all test parameters.
5. Instances where test results fall outside of the Maximum and/or Minimum Standards are
highlighted and an analysis of the error presented. BenchMark 5.0 allows for an essentially
unlimited number of error thresholds each with corresponding highlight colors and
comments. See Appendix “D”, Pass/Fail Annotation for a more detailed discussion.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-7


Baseline Test

Baseline Parameters (continued)


Steps to Proceed:
6. Nine command keys are located in lower portion of the window:
Command Function
BACK [B] Return to the MAIN MENU
NOTES [N] Enter comments into the test report and test record
REPORT [R] Print a Baseline Test Report
GRAPHS [G] Print the Baseline Performance Graphs
DRX [D] Link to BenchMark Diagnostic Reference™
EXPAND [X] Display Full Parameter window
ANNOTATE [A] Activate the Actuator Performance Graph annotation
EXPORT [E] Export the Baseline Test Results to an output location
RESET [T] Return to the two window presentation

7. Select Output Graphs in PDF Format to direct the GRAPHS [G] output to the creation of a
PDF file of the four performance graphs. This command is available only if Adobe Acrobat™
is located on the test system. If this option is unselected, output will be directed to the
hardcopy printer.
8. To facilitate communications with other computer programs and data management systems,
BenchMark 5.0 includes an export function for the Baseline Test Results. Press EXPORT [E] to
place two export files in the Current Record Path in a sub-directory labeled “OUTBOX”. The
files have the following names and formats:

[Current Tagnumber] + .bdt Tab Delimited Format


[Current Tagnumber] + .bdi Windows™ Profile File (INI) Format

9. Click on the button in the upper right-hand corner of the window or the RESET [T]
command key to return to the two Baseline Results windows.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-8


Baseline Test

Baseline Test Report

Figure 10.7
Baseline Test
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom and right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the bottom of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and
Close [X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Baseline Test Results windows.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-9


Baseline Test

Baseline Test Notes

Figure 10.8
Baseline Test
Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this Baseline test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the BLDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 10-10


11
Accuracy Tests

Page
Overview 11-1
Operator Caution 11-2
HDRL Test 11-3
HDRL Test Results 11-4
HDRL Test Report 11-5
HDRL Test Notes 11-6
Deadband Test 11-7
Deadband Test Results 11-8
Deadband Test Report 11-9
Deadband Test Notes 11-10
Accuracy Tests

Overview
BenchMark Accuracy tests include: Hysteresis + Deadband, Repeatability and Linearity; and
Deadband. These tests determine the valves overall quasi-static positioning performance and
other key performance indicators. It is not the intent of this manual to provide interpretation of
the results of these tests, but rather explain the means of obtaining this data.
HDRL Test (Hysteresis + Deadband, Repeatability and Linearity): The HDRL test procedures
are based on ISA-S75.13-1989, Method of Evaluating the Performance of Positioners with Analog
Input Signals and Pneumatic Output. This test determines both average and maximum values of
Hysteresis + Deadband and Repeatability Error.
Deadband: The Deadband test evaluates quasi-static Deadband by giving the valve a series of
very small control steps in each direction and determining when actual measurable response
occurs. Procedures are based on ISA-S75.13-1989, Method of Evaluating the Performance of
Positioners with Analog Input Signals and Pneumatic Output.

These definitions may prove helpful:


HYSTERESIS + DEADBAND: The absolute difference between response values at the same
measurement signal but after approaching from opposite directions, i.e. upscale and downscale
calibration cycles. Since testing involves a reversal of motion, the value inherently contains
Deadband. Although typically reported as the maximum value expressed as a percent of
calibration span, the average value warrants examination.
REPEATABILITY: The absolute difference between response values occurring as a result of
measurement on successive cycles. Although typically reported as the maximum value expressed as
a percent of calibration span, the average value warrants examination.
LINEARITY, BSL (Best Straight Line): The maximum deviation of the calibration curve (average of
upscale and downscale readings) from a best fit straight line. It is usually reported as the maximum
value expressed as a percent of calibration span.
DEADBAND: The range through which an input can be varied, upon reversal of direction,
without initiating a change in output.
QUASI-STATIC: A rate of motion so slow that the resulting response is approximately the same as
if a state of full equilibrium had occurred.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-1


Accuracy Tests

Operator Caution

Figure 11.1
Accuracy
Tests
Operator
Caution

Warning ! MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO MOVE THE CONTROL VALVE. IF IT IS NOT
SAFE TO PROCEED, CLICK ON BACK [B], EXIT [E], DISCONNECT THE BENCHMARK
SYSTEM AND CONSULT SAFETY OR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL.

Steps to Proceed:

1. This screen contains important information regarding the safe operation of the BenchMark
5.0 system. Please carefully read, review and understand the information contained in the
Cautions screen.
2. If you are unable or unsure about complying with this information, please disconnect the
BenchMark 5.0 system and consult safety or supervisory personnel before continuing.
3. To continue click on HDRL TEST [H], or DEADBAND [D] to perform the respective test.
Click on BACK [B] to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-2


Accuracy Tests

HDRL Test

Figure 11.2
HDRL Test

Steps to Proceed:
1. The HDRL test determines Hysteresis + Deadband, Repeatability and Linearity.
2. Holdtime is automatically set by the BenchMark 5.0 system based on the actuator type and
size. It can be set manually as described in Chapter 16, Configure System. It is important that
Holdtime be sufficiently large, so that the valve response is stable or quasi-static for accurate
test data. Prior to testing, the operator may select between 10% or 20% step-sizes for the
calibration cycle.
3. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. Testing is automatic from this point.
4. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on the TESTING [T] command
and testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the Main
Menu.
5. Valve Displacement, referenced to mid-span, is plotted in real-time as a function of the
control signal applied. BenchMark is not dependent on Windows™ to time the data
acquisition function; therefore, simultaneous use of other Windows™ based applications will
not affect the test.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-3


Accuracy Tests

HDRL Test Results

Figure 11.3
HDRL Test
Results
Window

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window is displayed at the conclusion of the HDRL test after all data recording and post-
test data processing have been completed. All results have been recorded to the system
computer hard disk before this window is displayed.
2. HDRL Errors for upscale and downscale steps are plotted in a graph of Error (%fs) versus
Percent Valve Stroke (%fs). Refer to Appendix “A”, Viewing Graphs, for a complete discussion
of the options and controls for customizing, exporting and manipulating this test graph.
3. At the bottom of the displayed window, Accuracy Errors are summarized in a data grid.
Average, Maximum, Standard and Status (Pass / Fail) are shown. Note that, by definition, only
the maximum value is displayed for Linearity Error. Refer to Chapter 14, Test Standards for
more details on Pass / Fail Comparisons.
4. Press PRINT REPORT [R], to print a HDRL Test Report; PRINT GRAPH [G] to print the HDRL
Graph; and NOTES [N], to enter comments into the report and record. Select Output Graphs
in PDF Format to direct the PRINT GRAPHS [G] output to the creation of a PDF file of the four
performance graphs. This command is available only if Adobe Acrobat™ is located on the test
system. If this option is unselected, output will be directed to the hardcopy printer.
5. Click on BACK [B] to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-4


Accuracy Tests

HDRL Test Report

Figure 11.4
HDRL Test
Results –
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom and right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and Close
[X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the HDRL Test Results window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-5


Accuracy Tests

HDRL Test Notes

Figure 11.5
HDRL Test
Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this HDRL test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the HDRLDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially
unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-6


Accuracy Tests

Deadband Test

Figure 11.6
Deadband
Test

Steps to Proceed:
1. The Deadband test determines the quasi-static Deadband Error.
2. The operator can select the location in span for this test to be performed. Holdtime is
automatically set by the BenchMark 5.0 system based on the actuator type and size. It can be
set manually as described in Chapter 16, Configure System. It is important that Holdtime be
sufficiently large, so that the valve response is stable or quasi-static for accurate test data.
3. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. Testing is automatic from this point.
4. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on TESTING [T] command and
testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the Main
Menu.
6. Valve Displacement is plotted in real-time as a function of the control signal applied. Starting
Signal, Delta Signal (change), Delta Travel (change), Signal Direction and Step are displayed in
the status box at the bottom of the test window. BenchMark is not dependent on Windows™
to time the data acquisition function; therefore, simultaneous use of other Windows™ based
applications will not affect the test.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-7


Accuracy Tests

Deadband Test Results

Figure 11.7
Deadband
Test Results

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window is displayed at the conclusion of the Deadband Test after all data recording and
post-test data processing have been completed. All results have been recorded to the system
computer hard disk before this window is displayed.
2. Valve Control Element response is plotted in a graph of Displacement from Seat (inch / mm)
versus Control Signal (%fs). Refer to Appendix “A”, Viewing Graphs for a complete discussion
of the options and controls for customizing, exporting and manipulating this test graph.
3. Deadband Error is summarized in a data grid. Deadband, Maximum Standard and Status (Pass
/ Fail) are shown. Refer to Chapter 14, Test Standards for details on Pass / Fail Comparisons.
4. Select Annotate to include descriptive text on the graph. Select Grid to show grid lines on the
graph.
5. Press PRINT REPORT [R], to print a Deadband Test Report; PRINT GRAPH [G] to print the
Deadband Graph; and NOTES [N], to enter comments into the test report and test record.
Select Output Graphs in PDF Format to direct the PRINT GRAPHS [G] output to the creation
of a PDF file of the four performance graphs. This command is available only if Adobe
Acrobat™ is located on the test system. If this option is unselected, output will be directed to
the hardcopy printer.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-8


Accuracy Tests

Deadband Test Report

Figure 11.8
Deadband
Test Results –
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom and right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and Close
[X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Deadband Test Results window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-9


Accuracy Tests

Deadband Test Notes

Figure 11.9
Deadband
Test
Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this Deadband test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the DBDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 11-10


12
Dynamic Tests

Page
Overview 12-1
Operator Caution 12-2
Step Utility Test 12-3
Step Response Test 12-7
Resolution Test 12-13
Sensitivity Test 12-17
Frequency Response Test 12-21
Dynamic Tests

Overview
The following tests can be accessed from this function: Step Utility, Step Response, Resolution,
Sensitivity and Frequency Response. These tests determine the valves overall dynamic
positioning performance. It is not the intent of this manual to provide interpretation of test
results, but rather explain the means of obtaining these data.
Step Utility: This is a utility test that allows the operator to move the control valve in any step-
size, increasing or decreasing signal, from any location in span. The dynamic response can then
be analyzed and reported.
Step Response: This step test is modeled after the recommendations of ISA-S75.13-1989,
Method of Evaluating the Performance of Positioners with Analog Input Signals and Pneumatic
Output. It evaluates the valves dynamic response to 100, 80, 10 and 2 percent steps in increasing
and decreasing directions.
Resolution: This test evaluates the valves ability to respond to progressively decreasing steps, 5,
2.5, 1 and 0.5 percent, that reverse direction and cause the valve to cross the Deadband. This
control simulation evaluates the ability of the valve to respond to dithering steps about a set-
point.
Sensitivity: This test evaluates the valves ability to respond to progressively decreasing steps, 5,
2.5, 1, and 0.5 percent, in the same direction. Both increasing and decreasing signals are
evaluated. This control simulation evaluates the ability of a valve to respond to the proportioning
signal that occurs as a valve is controlled onto a new set-point.
Frequency Response: Evaluates valves response to a variable frequency sinusoidal input signal.
Input signal is evaluated over one decade of frequency and at two amplitudes, 10 and 2 % peak
to peak. Procedures are based on ISA-S75.13-1989, Method of Evaluating the Performance of
Positioners with Analog Input Signals and Pneumatic Output.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


RESOLUTION: (BenchMark definition) Input resolution is the smallest change in input that a valve
will recognize when the signal changes include reversals across the Deadband.
SENSITIVITY: (BenchMark definition) Smallest input signal change that a valve will recognize
when the input signals are in the same direction.
SETPOINT: Input variable that establishes the desired value of the controlled variable.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE: The output behavior of a device as a function of the input with respect to
time.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-1


Dynamic Tests

Operator Caution

Figure 12.1
Dynamic
Tests
Ope
rator Caution

Warning !
MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO MOVE THE CONTROL VALVE. IF IT IS NOT SAFE TO
PROCEED, CLICK ON BACK [B], EXIT [E], DISCONNECT THE BENCHMARK SYSTEM AND
CONSULT SAFETY OR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL.

Steps to Proceed:

1. This window contains important information regarding the safe operation of the BenchMark
5.0 system. Please carefully read, review and understand the information contained in this
notice.
2. If you are unable or unsure about complying with this information, please disconnect the
BenchMark 5.0 system and consult safety or supervisory personnel before continuing.
3. To continue click on FREQUENCY RESPONSE [F], RESOLUTION [R], SENSITIVITY [N],
STEP RESPONSE [S] or STEP UTILITY [U], to perform the respective test. Click on BACK [B]
to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-2


Dynamic Tests

Step Utility Test

Figure 12.2
Step Utility
Test

Steps to Proceed:
1. This utility function allows the operator to enter the following test parameters (defaults are
shown in parentheses): Span Offset (50%), Step Size (10%), Duration (holdtime) and
Direction (increase). Holdtime is defined in Chapter 16, Configure System.
2. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. Testing is automatic from this point.
3. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on the TESTING [T] command
and testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the Main
Menu.
4. Click on ZOOM IN [I] to optimize the graph scaling. Click on ZOOM OUT [Z] to return to
change the graph displacement scale to show the full stroke of the valve. Command caption
changes with the zoom state.
5. Valve Displacement is plotted in real-time as a function of time.
6. Click on ANALYZE [A] at the conclusion of the test and BenchMark 5.0 will evaluate the
dynamic response of the valve step. If you do NOT click on ANALYZE [A] the test data will
NOT be recorded to the computer hard disk.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-3


Dynamic Tests

Step Utility Test Results

Figure 12.3
Step Utility
Test Results
Window

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window is displayed following the analysis of the Step Utility Test data. All results have
been recorded to the system computer hard disk before this window is displayed.
2. Valve response is plotted in a graph of Displacement from Seat (length unit) versus Time (sec).
Refer to Appendix “A”, Viewing Graphs, for a complete discussion of the options and controls
for customizing, exporting and manipulating this test graph.
3. At the right, the Dynamic Response Parameters are summarized in a data grid.
4. Select Annotate to include descriptive text on the graph. Select Grid to show grid lines on the
graph.
5. Press NOTES [N] to view existing notes that have been entered for this test that are displayed
in the text field. Additional notes can be entered into this text window and be attached to
the Step Utility Data Table as a memo field. The length of the notes entered is unlimited.
6. Click on: PRINT REPORT [R], to print a Step Utility Test Report; and PRINT GRAPH [G] to
print the Step Utility Graphs. Click on BACK [B] to return to the MAINMENU.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-4


Dynamic Tests

Step Utility Test Report

Figure 12.4
Step Utility -
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the PRINT REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom and right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and Close
[X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Step Utility Results Window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-5


Dynamic Tests

Step Utility Test Notes

Figure 12.5
Step Utility -
Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this Step Utility test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the SUDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-6


Dynamic Tests

Step Response Test

Figure 12.6
Step
Response
Test Window

Steps to Proceed:

1. The Standard Step Response Test evaluates the dynamic response of the valve to steps of
100, 80, 10 and 2% fs in the increasing and decreasing signal directions. Steps are centered
about 50% fs control signal. Holdtime is defined in Chapter 16, Configure System.
2. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. The testing is automatic from this
point.
3. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on the TESTING [T] command
and the testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the
Main Menu.
4. Valve Displacement is plotted in real-time as a function of time.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-7


Dynamic Tests

Step Response Test Results

Figure 12.7
Step
Response
Test Results

Steps to Proceed:
1. This screen is displayed at the conclusion of the Step Response Test. All results have been
recorded to the system computer hard disk before this window is displayed.
2. On the left-hand side is the “BenchMark Step Response Graphs” window displaying two of
the four dynamic response graphs. This window can be expanded to display all four graphs
by clicking on the button in the upper right-hand corner. The content of this window is
discussed in detail in the following section.
3. On the right-hand side is the “BenchMark Step Response Results” window containing a data
grid of dynamic response test results. This window can be expanded to review the Pass/Fail
performance by clicking on the button in the upper right-hand corner. This window is
discussed in a subsequent section of this chapter.
4. Click on NOTES [N], to enter comments into the report and record; click on REPORT [R], to
print a Step Response Test Report; and click on GRAPHS [G], to print the Step Response
Performance Graphs. Click on BACK [B] to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-8


Dynamic Tests

Step Response Test Results (continued)

Figure 12.8
Step
Response
Test Graphs

Steps to Proceed:
5. The window shown above is an expansion of the left-hand side of the primary Step Response
Test results windows.
6. The following graphs are displayed, in clockwise order beginning in the upper left-hand
corner: 100% step, 80% step, 10% step and 2% step. Each graph contains a plot of
displacement versus time for the increasing and decreasing steps. Dashed lines represent the
ideal response assuming valve travel versus signal is linear. Select Annotate to include
descriptive text on the graph.
7. Place the cursor on any graph and click the right mouse button. The graph will be
automatically enlarged to full-screen. Refer to Appendix “A”, Viewing Graphs, for a complete
discussion of the options and controls for customizing, exporting and manipulating the test
graphs.
8. Click on the button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to return to the combined
Step Response Test Results window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-9


Dynamic Tests

Step Response Test Results (continued)

Figure 12.9
Step
Response –
Tabular
Results

Steps to Proceed:
5. This is an expansion of the right-hand window of the Step Response Test Results windows.
6. The data grid displays sixteen (16) dynamic response performance parameters for each step
size in both the increasing and decreasing signal directions, along with a comparison to
selected Performance Standards and a determination of pass or fails status. The Performance
Standards can be enabled or disabled in the Configure System function and are set and
edited in the Test Standards function. Refer to Chapter 16, Configure System and Chapter 14,
Test Standards for more details.
7. Six command keys are located in the lower portion of the window: NOTES [N], to enter
comments into the report and record; REPORT [R], to print a Step Response Test Report;
GRAPHS [G] to print the Step Response Graphs; CLEAR [C] to remove annotations from the
graphs and RESET [R] to return to the combined Step Response Test Results window. Click
on BACK [B] to return to the Main Menu.
8. Select Grid to show grid lines on the graph. Select Output Graphs in PDF Format to direct the
graph output to the creation of a portable document format output.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-10


Dynamic Tests

Step Response Test Report

Figure 12.10
Step
Response -
Report

Steps to Proceed:

1. Press the PRINT REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and Close
[X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Step Response Test Results windows.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-11


Dynamic Tests

Step Response Test Notes

Figure 12.11
Step
Response -
Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this Step Response test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the SRDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-12


Dynamic Tests

Resolution Test

Figure 12.12
Resolution
Test Window

Steps to Proceed:

1. The Resolution Test evaluates the dynamic response of the valve to progressively smaller steps
of 5, 2.5, 1 and 0.5% fs in both the increasing and decreasing signal directions. The test starts
at the operator specified offset in span. Holdtime is defined in Chapter 16, Configure System.
2. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. The testing is automatic from this
point.
3. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on the TESTING [T] command
and the testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the
Main Menu.
4. Valve Displacement is plotted in real-time as a function of time.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-13


Dynamic Tests

Resolution Test Results

Figure 12.13
Resolution
Test Results

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window is displayed at the conclusion of the Resolution Test. All results have been
recorded to the system computer hard disk before this window is displayed.
2. At the top of the displayed results window, the valve responses for upscale and downscale
steps are plotted in a graph of displacement versus time. The dashed line represents the ideal
valve response assuming that valve travel versus control signal is linear. Refer to Appendix
“A”, Viewing Graphs, for a complete discussion of the options and controls for customizing,
exporting and manipulating this test graph.
3. At the bottom of the displayed window, Ideal Step, Actual Step, Step Error, Performance
Standard and Pass / Fail Status are shown for each step-size and direction. Refer to Chapter
14, Test Standards for details on Pass / Fail Comparisons.
4. Four command keys are located in the lower right-hand portion of the window: NOTES [N],
to enter comments into the report and record; PRINT REPORT [R], to print a Resolution Test
Report; and PRINT GRAPH [G] to print the Resolution Graph. Click on BACK [B] to return
to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-14


Dynamic Tests

Resolution Test Report

Figure 12.14
Resolution
Test - Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the PRINT REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom and right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and Close
[X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Resolution Results window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-15


Dynamic Tests

Resolution Test Notes

Figure 12.15
Resolution
Test - Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this Resolution test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the RESDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-16


Dynamic Tests

Sensitivity Test

Figure 12.16
Sensitivity
Test Window

Steps to Proceed:
1. The Sensitivity Test evaluates the dynamic response of the valve to progressively smaller steps
of 5, 2.5, 1 and 0.5% fs in the same signal direction. Both the increasing and decreasing
signal directions are evaluated. The test starts at the operator specified offset in span.
Holdtime is defined in Chapter 16, Configure System.
2. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. The testing is automatic from this
point.
3. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on the TESTING [T] command
and the testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the
Main Menu.
4. Valve Displacement is plotted in real-time as a function of time.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-17


Dynamic Tests

Sensitivity Test Results

Figure 12.17
Sensitivity
Test Results

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window is displayed at the conclusion of the Sensitivity Test. All results have been
recorded to the system computer hard disk before this window is displayed.
2. At the top of the displayed results window, the valve responses for upscale and downscale
step direction are plotted in a graph of displacement versus time. The ideal response is also
plotted. Refer to Appendix “A”, Viewing Graphs, for a complete discussion of the options and
controls for customizing, exporting and manipulating this test graph.
3. At the bottom of the displayed window, Ideal Step, Actual Step, Step Error, Performance
Standard and Pass / Fail Status are shown for each step-size and direction. Refer to Chapter
14, Test Standards for details on Pass / Fail Comparisons.
4. Four command keys are located in the lower right-hand portion of the window: NOTES [N],
to enter comments into the report and record; PRINT REPORT [R], to print a Sensitivity Test
Report; and PRINT GRAPH [G] to print the Sensitivity Graph. Click on BACK [B] to return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-18


Dynamic Tests

Sensitivity Test Report

Figure 12.18
Sensitivity
Test - Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the PRINT REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and Close
[X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Sensitivity Results window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-19


Dynamic Tests

Sensitivity Test Notes

Figure 12.19
Sensitivity
Test - Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this Sensitivity test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the SENSDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially
unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-20


Dynamic Tests

Frequency Response Test

Figure 12.20
Frequency
Response
Test Window

Steps to Proceed:
1. The Frequency Response Test evaluates the dynamic response of the valve to sinusoidal input
signals of 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.0 and 2.0 Hz at amplitudes of 10 and 2% peak to peak. The
test begins at the operator specified offset in span.
2. Click on the START [S] to begin the test. The command caption will change to TESTING [T]
and the BACK [B] command key will become inactive. The testing is automatic from this
point.
3. If for any reason you need to terminate the test early, click on the TESTING [T] command
and testing will halt. Click on the now active command key BACK [B] to return to the Main
Menu.
4. Valve Displacement is plotted in real-time as a function of time.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-21


Dynamic Tests

Frequency Response Test Results

Figure 12.21
Frequency
Response
Test Results

Steps to Proceed:
1. This screen is displayed following the Frequency Response Test. All results have been
recorded to the system computer hard disk before this window is displayed.
2. On the left-hand side of the displayed results window, the Gain (inverse attenuation ratio)
and Phase Lag are plotted as a function of input frequency for both input amplitudes. Refer
to Appendix “A”, Viewing Graphs, for a complete discussion of the options and controls for
customizing, exporting and manipulating these test graphs.
3. The top right-hand data grid displays Input Frequency [Hz], Gain [db] and Phase Lag [deg] for
each step size. If the output response is sinusoidal, dynamic response data are reported and
indicated as valid. The bottom data grid displays the Bandwidth of the valve, a Performance
Standard and a Pass / Fail Determination. Refer to Chapter 14, Test Standards for details on
Pass / Fail Comparisons.
4. Click on: NOTES [N], to enter comments into the report and record; PRINT REPORT [R], to
print a Frequency Response Test Report; and PRINT GRAPHS [G] to print the Frequency
Response Graphs. Click on BACK [B] to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-22


Dynamic Tests

Frequency Response Test Report

Figure 12.22
Frequency
Response
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the PRINT REPORT [R] command key to display the report Preview Window shown.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom right.
3. The test report will print exactly as shown in this preview.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Printer, Export, Zoom, Search and Close
[X]. These commands are active for the current report element and record only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Frequency Response Results window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-23


Dynamic Tests

Frequency Response Test Notes

Figure 12.23
Frequency
Response
Notes

Steps to Proceed:
1. Press the NOTES [N] command key to display the notes entry field shown.
2. This Notes Window can be relocated as a regular window. Existing notes that have been
previously entered for this Frequency Response test are displayed in the text field.
3. Additional notes can be entered into the text field and will be attached to the test record in
the FRDATA data table as a memo field. The length of notes entered is essentially unlimited.
4. Click on the OK [O] command key to save the entered notes, click on CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes to the notes for this record and return to the previous window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 12-24


13
Passive Monitor

Page
Overview 13-1
Operator Warning 13-2
Passive Monitor Setup 13-3
Passive Monitor, Recording Data 13-7
Output File Format 13-8
Passive Monitor

Overview
The Passive Monitor function provides a means to monitor an active, in-service valve for its
response to process variations.

Occasionally, a suspect control valve cannot be by-passed or isolated, as required, to run the
conventional diagnostic tests. In these instances, if the valve has been properly equipped with quick
connections on key pneumatic pressure lines, the valve can be thoroughly instrumented and
monitored without disturbance to the process.

The Passive Monitor function can input and record up to 8 data channels of data at intervals (per
channel) ranging from 0.01 seconds to several hours. Data are plotted in real time for operator review
and simultaneously written to the hard drive of the test system. The amount of data recorded is
limited only by the amount of storage available.

In general, the fastest responding air-operated control valves have frequency response break-points no
greater than 5 - 10 Hz. The more typical air-operated control valves have break-points one or two
orders of magnitude less (slower). Data acquisition rates equal to ten times the break-point frequency
are generally sufficient to capture any significant dynamic behavior. Unnecessarily fast rates result in
large files that are sometimes slow to analyze and may exceed the limits of the spreadsheet programs
used to manipulate them.

Passive Monitoring can be applied in a wide number of situations and with varied diagnostic intents.
It is not possible or practical to provide automated analyses for all of these diverse cases. Therefore,
data are recorded in a format easily imported into PC spreadsheets and other applications. A clear
heading is provided and all channels are recorded in engineering units. Beyond that, the analysis is
left to the operator.

WARNING!: The BenchMark system OUTPUT signal is NEVER connected to an active,


in-service valve.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-1


Passive Monitor

Operator Warning

Figure 13.1
Passive
Monitor,
Operator
Warning

Warning!
OBSERVE ALL UNIT AND FACILITY SAFETY RULES AND HAZARDOUS AREA PROCEDURES.
MAKE CERTAIN THAT IT IS SAFE TO CONNECT TRANSDUCERS TO THE CONTROL VALVE
WHILE IN-SERVICE. IF IT IS UNSAFE TO PROCEED, CLICK ON EXIT [E], DISCONNECT THE
BENCHMARK SYSTEM AND CONSULT SAFETY OR SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL.
MAKE CERTAIN THAT IT IS SAFE TO ACCESS THE CONTROL VALVE WHILE IT IS IN-
SERVICE. TAKE CARE NOT TO DISTURB SUPPLY AIR PRESSURE OR ANY OF THE
PNUEMATIC PRESSURES OF AN IN-SERVICE CONTROL VALVE.
BENCHMARK CONTROL SIGNAL OUTPUT IS NEVER CONNECTED DURING PASSIVE
MONITORING.

Steps to Proceed:
1. This is important information regarding the safe operation of the BenchMark Passive
Monitoring function. Please carefully read, review and understand the information contained
in this screen. If you are unable to comply with this information, please disconnect the
BenchMark system and consult safety or supervisory personnel before continuing.
2. Click CONTINUE [C] to begin testing. Click EXIT [E] to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-2


Passive Monitor

Passive Monitor Setup

Figure 13.2
Passive
Monitor,
Storage File

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on the File Information tab to set the Data Filename.
2. BenchMark 5.0 Passive Monitor will collect data and write it immediately to the file location
specified in this Data Filename field. Browse to display the filename dialog shown in Figure
13.2, above.
3. Data is output in comma delimited format which is readily imported by PC spreadsheet
applications.
4. The amount of data stored, is limited only by the available storage capacity of the logical
device.
5. Click on NOTES to enter comments regarding the Passive Monitor test. These notes will be
recorded in the header of the output file.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-3


Passive Monitor

Passive Monitor Setup (continued)


Figure 13.3
Passive
Monitor,
Options

Steps to Proceed:
6. Click on the Options tab to set the Passive Monitor Options.
7. Sampling Interval: Enter the time in seconds for each successive update of the selected data
channels. In the example of Figure 13.3, above, the data channels will be measured and
recorded every 0.5 seconds. To convert this to sampling frequency, divide the sampling time
into 1. The result is the sampling frequency in Hertz. In most cases, it is not necessary or
advisable to have a very short sampling interval. The natural frequency of most valve systems
is 1 Hertz or less. It is a good rule of thumb to sample at ten (10) times the natural frequency,
to properly capture any significant valve response. Therefore, a sampling rate of 10 hertz
(0.10 seconds) is adequate for most dynamic situations.
8. Graph Window: Set the extent of the current graph view. In the example of Figure 13.3, the
graph will display a maximum of five (5) minutes of data before scrolling. All data is being
recorded to the file storage location.
9. Create Output File: Select this option to record the measured data to the storage file. If this
option is not selected, no data will be recorded.
10. Save Settings: Select this option to preserve the Passive Monitor settings as they exist when
this function ends.
11. Zero Displacement at Start: Select this option if you want the Displacement data that is
recorded to be referenced to the starting location. If this option is unselected, the
Displacement data will be recorded without zeroing to any reference location.
12. Zero Auxiliary Displacement at Start: Select this option if you want the Auxiliary
Displacement data that is recorded to be referenced to the starting location. If this option is
unselected, the Auxiliary Displacement data will be recorded without zeroing to any
reference location.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-4


Passive Monitor

Passive Monitor Setup (continued)


Figure 13.4
Passive
Monitor,
Valve
Information

Steps to Proceed:
13. Click on the Valve Information tab to input key Passive Monitor parameters. It is
recommended that a BenchMark Valve Record be created for the valve being monitored and
that the record is made the Current Record. However, this is not required and it is possible to
enter the Passive Monitor function without having a current valve record. In this event, it is
necessary for the operator to input information about the valve and transducer mounting. If a
valve record is located and made current this information is entered automatically.
14. Configuration: Select the basic valve configuration: Linear or Rotary
15. Air Action: Select the Air Action of the valve: ATO for Air to Open; ATC for Air to Close.
16. Displacement Transducer Mounting: Select the Displacement Transducer Mounting
location: Actuator housing; or Valve Body. Choose the appropriate description of the location
of the displacement transducer used to measure valve stem or shaft motion. If the valve has
been made the Current Record and the Calibration Function has been completed,
BenchMark 5.0 already knows the location and this selection would be pre-selected as Auto.
17. This information is also recorded in the output file header.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-5


Passive Monitor

Passive Monitor Setup (continued)


Figure 13.5
Passive
Monitor,
Data
Channels
Recorded

Steps to Proceed:
18. Click on the Data Channels Recorded tab to select the channels recorded. Channels can be
selected or unselected during the monitoring.
19. Click to select the channels to be recorded during the monitoring. Channels selected are
recorded and channels unselected are NOT recorded.
20. Do not select channels that are not connected to transducers. Open channels will record
only system noise. This will result in data columns containing erroneous and possibly
misleading data.
21. Displacement: Control element position, inches or mm.
22. Signal: Pressure signal to valve, psi or kPa.
23. Actuator Pressure: Actuator diaphragm pressure, psi or kPa.
24. Supply: Pressure of the air pressure supplying the positioner, psi or kPa.
25. Top Cylinder Pressure: Pressure in the top chamber of double-acting actuator, psi or kPa.
26. Bottom Cylinder Pressure: Pressure in the bottom chamber of double-acting actuator, psi or
kPa.
27. Auxiliary Pressure: Pressure input into the pressure auxiliary channel (6), psi or kPa.
28. Auxiliary Displacement: Displacement input into the auxiliary channel (7), psi or kPa.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-6


Passive Monitor

Passive Monitor, Recording Data

Figure 13.6
Passive
Monitor,
Recording
Data

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 Passive will display all selected channels (in engineering units) as they are
being recorded. You may add or switch off channels in real-time.
2. Records: This field indicates the rows of data recorded in the storage file. If the filename
already exists, the operator will be advised at the start of testing and given the option of
appending to the existing table.
3. Engineering units are established by the Current System Units (Chapter 16, Configure System).
4. Data will be recorded at the sampling interval until the monitoring is stopped or the capacity
of the logical device containing the storage file is exceeded.
5. The displayed graph will be scaled automatically and will maintain the display interval set in
the Options tab.
6. To terminate the monitoring, click on the STOP [S] command. Click on the now active
command key BACK [B] to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-7


Passive Monitor

Output File Format

Figure 13.7
Passive
Monitor,
Output File
in
Spreadsheet
Format Steps to Proceed:
1. As mentioned previously, it is not possible to provide an automated analysis of all the
possible monitoring configurations and diagnostic intents. Instead, the data are recorded to
an easy to import Comma Delimited file structure.
2. Figure 13.7 displays an example file imported into a popular PC spreadsheet program. As
can be seen, the header of the file provides information regarding the test date, time and
operator entered notes. Sampling interval and scale factors for each channel are
documented.
3. Data is stored in a row and column format with each column labeled as to channel and units.
4. Each row contains both a data point number and time value.
5. Unrecorded channels are recorded as an integer zero.
6. The graph shown has been created using the spreadsheet application for illustration purposes
and is not created as a part of the output file creation.
7. Detailed analysis and reporting are left to the operator.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 13-8


14
Test Standards

Page
Overview 14-1
Standards Menu 14-2
Baseline Calibration Standards 14-3
Baseline Actuator Standards 14-4
Baseline Positioner /
Signal Transducer Standards 14-5
Baseline Standards Report 14-6
HDRL Standards 14-7
Deadband Standard 14-8
Resolution Standards 14-9
Sensitivity Standards 14-10
Step Response Standards 14-11
Frequency Response Standards 14-12
Accuracy / Dynamic Standards Report 14-13
Test Standards

Overview
Test results by themselves are of limited value. One of the most important features of BenchMark
Control Valve Diagnostics™ is the ability to compare test results with expected values. These
clear, timely, “pass / fail” performance comparisons identify poor performing valves quickly and
accurately. Additionally, valve behavior can be monitored over time by reviewing the data
recorded in the BenchMark 5.0 data tables. In this way, significant performance trends can be
identified to predict problems before the valve fails or adversely affects the process.
BenchMark 5.0 provides a means of automatically establishing unique performance standards for
each valve tested. When a valve record is entered for the first time, “default” performance
standards for each test are calculated using the valve configuration data and are recorded in each
of the Test Standard data tables. Using this BenchMark 5.0 function, Test Standards can be easily
modified and customized to meet the special requirements of each customer and valve.
At the conclusion of each test, results are compared to appropriate performance standards and
“Pass” or “Fail” is reported for each parameter. This gives the operator a clear indication of
whether the valve is performing to plant requirements without the need for complicated
calculations or guesswork. For example, at the conclusion of the Baseline Test, thirty (30)
performance parameters are reported. It would require an extremely knowledgeable, well-
trained operator with a phenomenal memory to remember all of the performance expectations
for the particular model and type of valve under test, as well as recalling which of the parameters
are important to the end-user and which are not. Add in the math calculations and you have a
truly amazing feat. The value of a customized set of performance standards that are automatically
and systematically applied is easy to appreciate.
This function allows the operator to enable comparisons meaningful to the end-user and disable
the ones that are not. Simply enter a zero in the standard fields that are not to be compared. If
appropriate, the “pass / fail” comparison can be disabled completely by the user in a simple and
direct way. Refer to Chapter 16, System Configuration for more details. Appropriate standards are
included on each test report, and can be edited before or after testing.

The following definition may prove helpful:


DEFAULT: In this context, a pre-loaded response to a software request for data or information. It
is a response that the software uses automatically, if the operator does not enter different data.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-1


Test Standards

Standards Menu

Figure 14.1
Test
Standards
Menu

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window is available only when there is a Current Valve Record.
2. Click on BASELINE STDS [B] to access the comparison standards for the overall valve,
positioner and I/P performance determined in the Baseline Test.
3. Click on ACCURACY / DYNAMIC STDS [A] to access the comparison standards for the
following tests: quasi-static accuracy test, HDRL (Hysteresis + Deadband, Repeatability and
Linearity); quasi-static accuracy test, Deadband; Resolution test; Sensitivity test; Step
Response Test; and Frequency Response Test.
4. Click on BACK to return to the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-2


Test Standards

Baseline Calibration Standards

Figure 14.2
Baseline
Calibration
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Baseline Calibration performance standards for the current valve
record. All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

The following definition may prove helpful:


NOMINAL (NOM): The desired value within a range of values. For example, if the acceptable
values is specified as 100 ± 10, the maximum is 110, the minimum is 90 and the nominal is 100.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-3


Test Standards

Baseline Actuator Standards

Figure 14.3
Baseline
Actuator
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Baseline Actuator performance standards for the current valve
record. All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard de-select, by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-4


Test Standards

Baseline Positioner / Signal Transducer Standards

Figure 14.4
Baseline
Positioner /
Signal
Transducer
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Baseline Positioner / Signal Transducer performance standards for
the current valve record. All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-5


Test Standards

Baseline Standards Report

Figure 14.5
Baseline
Standards
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on REPORT [R] to print or export a report containing the current Baseline Performance
Standards.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the right.
3. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Zoom, Printer and Export. These are
active for the current table only.
4. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Baseline Performance Standards function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-6


Test Standards

HDRL Standards

Figure 14.6
HDRL
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Accuracy HDRL performance standards for the current valve record.
All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-7


Test Standards

Deadband Standards

Figure 14.7
Deadband
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Deadband performance standards for the current valve record. All
field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-8


Test Standards

Resolution Standards

Figure 14.8
Resolution
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Step Resolution performance standards for the current valve record.
All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-9


Test Standards

Sensitivity Standards

Figure 14.9
Sensitivity
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Step Sensitivity performance standards for the current valve record.
All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-10


Test Standards

Step Response Standards

Figure 14.10
Step
Response
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Step Response performance standards for the current valve record.
All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-11


Test Standards

Frequency Response Standards

Figure 14.11
Frequency
Response
Standards

Steps to Proceed:
1. This window displays the Frequency Response performance standards for the current valve
record. All field terms are contained in Chapter 18, Glossary.
2. If the record has been edited, the field to the left of the command keys will change to
“EDITED”. Click on RELOAD DEFAULTS [D] to return to the default values.
3. Enter or modify standards as appropriate. Note that some of the standards require a
minimum and maximum value to create an acceptable performance window.
4. If you do not want a comparison made for a particular standard, de-select by clicking on the
check box to the left of the standard description. Alternatively, enter zero or a blank field.
5. Click on SAVE [S] to save the changes or CANCEL [C] to abandon any changes and return to
the Main Menu.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-12


Test Standards

Accuracy / Dynamic Standards Report

Figure 14.12
Accuracy /
Dynamic
Standards
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on REPORT [R] to print or export a report containing the current Accuracy / Dynamic
Performance Standards.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the right.
3. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Zoom, Printer and Export. These are
active for the current table only.
4. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Accuracy / Dynamic Standards function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 14-13


15
Database Tools

Page
Overview 15-1
BenchMark Database 15-2
Menu Table Editing 15-3
Catalog Table Editing 15-4
Find Utility 15-5
Order Utility 15-7
SQL Query 15-8
Structured Query Language, SQL 15-9
Export Table Function 15-10
Table Report Function 15-11
Database Tools

Overview
BenchMark 5.0 is database-oriented. Valve descriptions, test results, post-test comments and
system data are stored as records within independent, coordinated data tables. BenchMark 5.0
coordinates, references and manages these tables automatically.
Information has value if it helps you make decisions; otherwise, it is simply “raw” data.
BenchMark 5.0 converts “raw” test data into concise on-screen parameter summaries, clear “pass
/ fail” comparisons, useful pre-formatted graphs and timely professional reports. A powerful
analysis tool available with a database-oriented system is the ability to review and evaluate data
from a number of different tests on the same valve or review the results of testing on a variety of
valves linked by common configurations, characteristics or performance. Again, value comes
from having timely access to the data.
With this function, the operator can quickly review, print or export the data tables stored on the
test system. Additionally, tools are provided to query the data tables using Structured Query
Language, SQL, Order (sort) the data and Find select records within a table. Many excellent PC
applications are available that are very useful in the analysis of the valve data. For this reason,
data tables within the BenchMark 5.0 database are completely accessible with standard,
commercially available, PC database software.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


RECORD: In a data table, a record is a complete unit of related information. Each record is an
electronic file folder containing fields with an immediate relevance to one another. For example,
the valve identification record contains data identifying one individual valve.
DATA TABLE: A collection of records that have some underlying relationship with one another.
For example, a Valve Identification Table will have the Identification records for a variety of valves.
All records within a data table have identical format and variable content.
DATABASE: A group or collection of one or more data tables which are relevant to one another
because of the application or purpose of the software. For example, BenchMark 5.0 coordinates a
number of data tables containing valve records, system records and test results to absolutely
minimize the operator’s clerical work and to maximize the access and usefulness of the data that is
stored by powerful reporting and search tools.
QUERY: A temporary set of records defined by a question posed in terms of a Structured Query
Language, SQL Statement.
ORDER (sort): A method of organizing data within a data table by placing records in order of
rank set by the value of one or more fields that are logically related.
FIND: A tool that searches for records within a data table that meet specified parameters. The
records that meet the criteria are selected.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-1


Database Tools

BenchMark Database

Figure 15.1
BenchMark
Database

Steps to Proceed:
1. By default, this function opens with the grid displaying the Baseline (BLDATA) data table. In
the example of Figure 15.1, the Menus table type has been expanded.
2. BenchMark Tables: This tree list contains the tables of the BenchMark Database grouped by
function. Select the group element to expand the list and display the various tables. Click on
a table to load the contents into the grid.
Table Type Contents Path (Current)
Test Data Test Data Records Record
Menus Menu Contents Menu
Transducers Transducer Data BenchMark System
Performance Standards Performance Standards Record
Catalogs Catalog Contents Catalog
System BenchMark System Tables BenchMark System
Standard Rules Standard Calculation Rules Std Rules
Photos Photos and Images Record
Default Menus, Catalog & StdRules Default Content BenchMark Default

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-2


Database Tools

Menu Table Editing

Figure 15.2
Menu Table
Editing

Steps to Proceed:
1. Select a Menu Table: In the BenchMark Tables tree list, click on the Menu Table to be
edited. In the example of Figure 15.2, the SHOPMNU.DBF Menu File has been selected and
loaded into the grid.
2. Select the Edit Table option to enable the Modify Tables editing commands.
3. The contents of this table are extracted by column and not by row. Each column heading
describes a list box in the Configuration function. The column entries are loaded into the
Configuration function list box in the same order as they appear in the column. Blank entries
are acceptable and will be removed during loading.
4. Double-click on the Menu Item to edit. Clear the cell contents to delete a list element.
5. Press ADDNEW [A] to add a new row to the table. Select the Enable Delete option to enable
the Modify Tables DELETE [D] command. Press DELETE [D] to delete the current row.
Note: this command will affect all list box controls in a Menu Table. Use with caution.
Remove individual list elements as described in step 4.
6. Press SAVE [S] to make permanent changes to the Menu File. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon
any changes.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-3


Database Tools

Catalog Table Editing

Figure 15.3
Catalog Table
Editing

Steps to Proceed:
1. Select a Catalog Table: In the BenchMark Tables tree list, click on the Catalog Table to be
edited. In the example of Figure 15.3, the Actuator Data [ACTUATOR] table has been
selected and loaded into the grid.
2. Select the Edit Table option to enable the Modify Tables editing commands.
3. Click on the record to be edited, causing the record to highlight. Double-click on the cell
contents to be changed. Make desired changes.
4. After editing the cell contents, the operator may make the permanent changes using SAVE [S]
or cancel the changes using CANCEL [C]. The operator will be prompted to save or cancel
changes if the currently selected record changes after editing.
5. Press ADDNEW [A] to add a new row to the table. Select the Enable Delete option to enable
the record removal from the table. Press DELETE [D] to delete the current record (row).
6. Press SAVE [S] to make permanent changes to the Catalog Table. Press CANCEL [C] to
abandon any changes.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-4


Database Tools

Find Utility

Figure 15.4
Find Utility

Steps to Proceed:
1. Select Table to Search: In the BenchMark Tables tree list, click on the BenchMark Table to be
searched. In the example of Figure 15.4, the Baseline Data [BLDATA] table has been selected
and loaded into the grid.
2. Press FIND [F] to display the Find Records dialog. Select the Field to be searched in the In
this Field list. Select Which Record is to be returned: First, Last or All Matching records. Select
the Matching Rules: Exact, Like, Greater Than (numeric only) and Less Than (numeric only).
3. Enter the criteria to be searched for into the Find entry field. If the Matching Rules are set to
Exact this is the equivalent of [FIELD VALUE] = [CRITERIA]. If Matching Rules are set to Like
the equivalent expression is [FIELD VALUE] Like [CRITERIA]. Wildcards recognized are:
WildCard Characters Matches in Criteria String
? Single Character
* Zero or more Characters
# Any Single Digit
[charlist] Any Single Character in charlist
[!charlist] Any Single Character not in charlist

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-5


Database Tools

Find Utility (continued)


4. When using the operator LIKE, certain conventions apply. The following shows formats for
typing entries into the Value field.

Purpose Value Example Returns


Select records containing “am”. am* ram, rams, damsel, amnesty
Select records beginning with “John”. John* Johnson, Johnsson
Select records ending with “son” *son Johnson, Anderson
Select records beginning with “Glen” Glen? Glenn, Glens
having any single trailing character.

Select records containing “am” and any ?am dam, Pam, ram
single preceding character.

Select records containing “am” with ??am?? tramps, cramps


two preceding characters and two
trailing characters.

5. Press FIND RECORD [F] to begin the search or press CANCEL [C] to return to the
Database Tools function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-6


Database Tools

Order Utility

Figure 15.5
Order Utility

Steps to Proceed:
1. Select Table to Order: In the BenchMark Tables tree list, click on the BenchMark Table to be
ordered. In the example of Figure 15.5, the Baseline Data [BLDATA] table has been selected
and loaded into the grid.
2. Press ORDER [O] to display the Order Records dialog.
3. From the Available Fields, select the fields to be used as sort keys. Using the > command
place them in the Sort Key list in the order of precedence. The key will be placed with either
Ascending or Descending order depending on the Sort Direction for Added Field state at the
time of placement. Use the < command to remove items form the Sort Key Field list.
4. Press ORDER TABLE [O] to place the current table in the desired order or press CANCEL [C]
to abandon this utility and return to the Database Tools function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-7


Database Tools

SQL Query

Figure 15.6
SQL Query

Steps to Proceed:
1. Select Table to Order: In the BenchMark Tables tree list, click on the BenchMark Table to be
queried. In the example of Figure 15.6, the Baseline Data [BLDATA] table has been selected
and loaded into the grid.
2. Press SQL QUERY [Q] to display the SQL Query dialog.
3. Select Examples to load the drop-down list with example SQL Queries tailored for the
current table. Select Custom Queries to load the drop-down list with queries created and
saved previously by the operator. Selecting from the drop-down list will place the query in
the SQL Query entry field where it can be modified and executed or executed directly.
These example queries are often a good base from which to develop more complicated
queries. Alternatively, a SQL query can be directly entered into the SQL Query entry field.
4. Press RESET [R] to reset the table and display all records.
5. Press SAVE [S] to save the current SQL Query to the Custom Queries list. Press DELETE [D]
to remove the currently selected query from the list.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-8


Database Tools

Structured Query Language, SQL


Steps to Proceed:
1. This function complies with Microsoft Access SQL syntax rules.
2. There are many excellent sources for information on writing Structured Query Language
statements for Microsoft Access™ and dBase IV™ tables. This manual is not intended to be a
tutorial on this topic since the information is so well presented elsewhere. Black Diamond
Engineering Customer Service can provide you with a list of published references.
3. In general, a SQL statement consists of three basic parts: a parameter declaration, a
manipulative statement and an option declaration. Queries are not case sensitive. A simple
example is:
Select TESTDATE, TESTNUM, and FRICTION from BLDATA, where TESTDATE is
BETWEEN #01/01/2001# and #12/31/2001#
This statement consists of a manipulative statement (Select … from) and an option
declaration (where …). This statement returns the test date, test number and average friction
fields for all Baseline tests recorded between January 1, 2001 and December 31, 2001. Note
that the ‘#’ sign is needed in Microsoft Access SQL™ to enclose date values. See Appendix
“B” Summary of Data Tables, for a listing of all data table fields
4. Click EXECUTE [E] to process the SQL statement contained in the “SQL Query” text field.
The results of the query will be placed into the data grid for review and export. If the query
cannot be processed because of an error in the SQL statement, the operator will be notified
by an on-screen message. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the SQL Query dialog and return to
the Database Tools function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-9


Database Tools

Export Table Function

Figure 15.7
Exporting
Table
Contents

Steps to Proceed:
1. The contents of the grid can be exported to any Windows™ path accessible to the system.
2. Press EXPORT [E] to export the current grid in tab-delimited format. This format is readily
imported into PC spreadsheets and other applications.
3. A File Dialog window will be displayed requesting the operator to identify the file name and
destination path.
4. Press SAVE [S] to export the file. Press CANCEL [C] to abandon the export function and
return to the Database Tools function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-10


Database Tools

Table Report Function

Figure 15.8
Table Report
Functions

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on REPORT [R] to print or export a report containing the contents of the grid.
2. Output is limited using this reporting tool to one landscape page width on the current
printer. Use AUTOSIZE [A] to optimize display field widths and relocate columns as needed
to maximize and prioritize the columns printed.
3. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the right.
4. At the top of the Preview Window are several icons: Zoom, Printer and Export. These are
active for the current table only.
5. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Database Tools function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 15-11


16
Configure System

Page
Overview 16-1
Transducer Selection 16-2
Transducer Table Generation 16-3
Update Transducer Calibration 16-4
Update Calibration – Select Files 16-5
Calibration Report 16-6
Data Management 16-7
Set System Units 16-11
System Options 16-12
System Information 16-14
Customer Path Options 16-16
Configure System

Overview
Basic configuration of the BenchMark 5.0 system is performed using this window including:
Transducer Management, Default Data Paths, System Units, System Options, System Information
and Customer Based Path Options. The functions and settings contained in each of these tabs are
discussed in detail in the following sections of this chapter.
Use the SAVE [S] function to apply changes and make the current settings the default value. If
this window is exited using CANCEL [C], all changes are abandoned.

The following definitions may prove helpful:


TRANSDUCER: A device that converts a physical phenomenon, in this case force or displacement,
into an electrical signal such as current, voltage or frequency.
SCALE FACTOR: The factor by which the transducer response, in this case electrical signal, must
be multiplied to compute the value of the measured response in engineering units.
ROTARY REFERENCE DIAMETER: During rotary valve testing, a collar attached to the rotating
shaft, winds the cable from the displacement transducer. The diameter of the collar is used to
calculate the shaft rotation angle from the observed extension or retraction measured by the
displacement transducer using the expression: θ = (360*L) / (πD) where L = Measured Length; D
= Rotary Reference Diameter and θ = Shaft Rotation.
HOLD TIME (STABILIZATION): Time in seconds that the control valve is allowed to stabilize
before the next procedural step or before data is recorded during the test.
RAMP TIME: Time in seconds required for either the increasing or decreasing portion of the
calibration cycle. Total time is approximately twice the ramp time.
PATH: A complete Windows™ specification of the logical device (drive), directories (folders), and
sub-directories where a file is located or is to be located.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-1


Configure System

Transducer Selection

Figure 16.1
Configure
System
Transducers

Steps to Proceed:
1. The Transducers tab manages the displacement and pressure transducers used in the testing.
2. The Current Transducer set is shown in the grid at the top of the window. A/D Channel,
Transducer Name, Color-code, Interface Connection Label, Range, Transducer Units, BD Serial
Number, Scale Factor, Cal Date, Calibration Interval and Table Type are shown for each
currently registered transducer. Two-color transducer designations; such as: “RED/GREEN” or
“BLUE-WHITE” are acceptable.
3. To change a currently registered transducer, highlight it and press MODIFY [M] to enable the
grid containing Available Transducers – Local Table. Only transducers of the same type as the
currently selected transducer will be displayed in the local transducer table. Review available
transducers, highlight the desired transducer and press LOAD SELECTED TRANSDUCER [L].
The selected transducer will be placed into the Current Transducer Set.
4. Transducers may be loaded in either US or SI (metric) units. When a transducer is placed into
the Active Transducer Set (A/D System) it is automatically converted to current system units.
The following definition may prove helpful:
CURRENT TRANSDUCER SET: The transducers required by the test system to perform the Baseline
test: Displacement, Signal Pressure, Actuator Pressure for single acting actuators or Top Pressure and
Bottom Pressure for double acting actuators, and Supply Pressure.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-2


Configure System

Transducer Table Generation

Figure 16.2
Identifying
Transducer
Files

Steps to Proceed:
1. BenchMark 5.0 handles transducer identification and calibration information differently than
previous versions. The changes make it easier to update individual transducers and add
replacement transducers without editing or replacing the TRANSCAL Table.
2. As shown in the example above, Figure 16.2, transducer data is contained in individual files,
identified by unique serial number and the suffix “.xdr”. These transducer files are located in
the BenchMark 5.0 system path: “System\transducers.”
3. At startup, BenchMark 5.0 automatically generates the TRANSCAL Table from the “xdr” files
available in this path. The TRANSCAL Table is then used in the selection of transducers as in
previous versions.
4. If transducer files are not available, as in the case of a recently updated system that has not
had its transducers re-calibrated, BenchMark 5.0 will automatically analyze the existing
TRANSCAL Table and create the appropriate transducer files. The next time the system is
started, the TRANSCAL Table will be generated from the transducer files as normal.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-3


Configure System

Update Transducer Calibration

Figure 16.3
Update
Transducer
Calibration
Path

Steps to Proceed:
1. Transducers used in the BenchMark 5.0 system should be recalibrated periodically and more
frequently if subjected to rough use. Black Diamond Engineering™ offers calibration services
for both displacement and pressure transducers.
2. Transducers calibrated by Black Diamond Engineering™ will be returned with one standard
3.5” diskette containing files corresponding to the transducers calibrated.
3. Load the diskette into the floppy disk drive and when ready press UPDATE CALIBRATION
[U]. Do not select the Update Selected Transducers option for this operation.
4. The BenchMark 5.0 system will automatically scan the floppy drive as shown in the example
above, Figure 16.3. If transducer files are not contained on a standard 3.5” diskette, browse
to the path containing the appropriate transducer files.
5. Press OK to continue the update process. Press Cancel to abandon the update and return to
the System Configuration function.
6. All transducer files contained on the source path will be copied to the BenchMark 5.0 system
transducer path. A new TRANSCAL Table will be generated and the operator will be asked
for permission to update the transducers registered to the Active Transducer Set (A/D System).

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-4


Configure System

Update Calibration – Select Files

Figure 16.4
Select
Specific Files
to Update

Steps to Proceed:
1. To update the calibration of an individual transducer or a limited number of transducers set
the Update Selected Transducers option on and press UPDATE CALIBRATION [U].
2. The “Select Transducer Files to Upgrade” dialog will be displayed. Select the desired
transducer (xdr) files.
3. Press Open to continue the update process. Press CANCEL to abandon the update and
return to the System Configuration function.
4. The transducer files selected on the source path will be copied to the BenchMark 5.0 system
transducer path. A new TRANSCAL Table will be generated and the operator will be asked
for permission to update the transducers registered to the Active Transducer Set (A/D System).

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-5


Configure System

Calibration Report

Figure 16.4
Calibration
Report

Steps to Proceed:
1. Click on CAL REPORT [R] to print or export a report summarizing this transducer setup and
detailing the calibration data.
2. This Preview Window can be maximized by the button at the top right, relocated as a regular
window or reviewed by moving the scroll bars at the bottom and right.
3. At the bottom of the Preview Window are several icons: Zoom, Printer and Export. These are
active for the current report element and record only.
4. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Configure System Window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-6


Configure System

Data Management

Figure 16.5
Data Path
Management

Steps to Proceed:
1. The Default Data Paths tab manages the Windows™ paths used to store or access various
types of BenchMark 5.0 data. BenchMark 5.0 can store test data on any Windows™ path
accessible to the test system. The following paths are managed: Record Storage, Graph File
Storage – Auto, Graph File Storage – Manual, Menu File, Catalog Table and Standard Rules.
2. If Coordinate Paths is selected, BenchMark 5.0 will use the Record Path entered to
automatically set coordinated paths for the Graph File Storage Paths – Auto, Graph File
Storage Paths – Manual, Catalog Path and Standard Rules Path. If the paths do not exist,
BenchMark 5.0 will automatically create them and load all necessary, empty data structures.
The operator will be asked to select a Menu File on the coordinated path. If the operator
declines, the current Menu File will not be changed. If Coordinate Paths is not selected,
each path must be entered manually by browsing.
3. After each test, BenchMark 5.0 writes a Graph File ([testnumber].dat), containing all of the
data necessary to recreate the test graphs, to the current Graph File Storage Path. This path
can be managed automatically by test date. If Auto Manage Graphs Files is selected, Graph
File Storage – Auto will be enabled; otherwise, Graph File Storage – Manual will be
enabled.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-7


Configure System

Data Management (continued)

Figure 16.6
Data Path
Selection

Steps to Proceed:
4. Record Storage: Browse to enter the Windows™ path to the Test Record Database. It may be
convenient to name this path for the customer or unit. See Chapter 5, Locate Record for
more details. Although not required, it is recommended, for clarity, that this pathname
include the term “DATABASE”.
5. Graph File Storage - Auto: Browse to enter the Windows™ path used to store Graph Files
when Auto Manage Graphs Files is selected. BenchMark 5.0 will automatically create sub-
paths by testing year and month. For example, a test completed in July 2002 would be
placed in a sub-path named: “\Y02_M08\”, “Y” indicating the year and “M” the month. This
provides a convenient means of locating graph data. It may be convenient to include the
customer or unit name in the path. See Chapter 5, Locate Record for more details. Although
not required, it is recommended for clarity that this pathname include the term “DATFILE”.
6. Graph File Storage - Manual: Browse to enter the Windows™ path used to store
BenchMark Graph Files when Auto Manage Graphs Files is not selected. Since no sub-path
management is performed, Graph Files will be placed in this path until it is changed. It may
be convenient to include the customer or unit name in the path. See Chapter 5, Locate
Record for more details. Although not required, it is recommended for clarity that this
pathname include the term “DATFILE”.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-8


Configure System

Data Management (continued)


Steps to Proceed:
7. For future reference, the path where the test data file is written is recorded in a field in the
THISTORY data table and in the appropriate Test Results data table.
8. Test numbers are a total of eight (8) characters and numbers in the following format:
[Test Symbol] + [Last Digit of Year] + [Sequence Number, ####] + [System Designation]

9. Symbols assigned for each test are as follows:


Baseline “B”
HDRL “H”
Deadband “D”
Step Utility “U”
Step Response “S”
Resolution “R”
Sensitivity “N”
Frequency Response “F”
10. SmartPath Searching: When recreating a test results window, BenchMark 5.0 initially
attempts to recover Graph File data from the storage location contained in the stored test
record. If unsuccessful, the THISTORY table is examined for the data storage path logged
when the test was originally performed. If this also proves unsuccessful, BenchMark 5.0 then,
if the SmartPath Searching option is selected (Figure 16.4), uses SmartPath searching.
11. BenchMark 5.0 automatically maintains a table of successfully used Graph File paths and
systematically searches these records attempting to locate graph data for the selected test. If
the Notify option is also checked in the SmartPath Searching option, BenchMark 5.0 will
notify the operator of the location of data found and ask permission to load it. If Notify is not
selected, the first data located for the selected test will be loaded without operator notice.
12. If the search of the SmartPath table is unsuccessful, the operator will be asked for permission
to search the current computer for the test data.
13. SmartPath will locate all instances of the graph data file on the current computer and ask the
operator to select the desired graph data file to load. The SmartPath table will then be
updated with this new path so that subsequent records will be promptly located. SmartPath
table is managed by access date. Paths unused for one year are removed from the table.

The following definition may prove helpful:


SYSTEM DESIGNATION: A two element character field in the Owner data table that allows up to
1296 unique identifications for the test system.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-9


Configure System

Data Management (continued)

Figure 16.7
Menu File
Selection

Steps to Proceed:
14. Menu File: The filename shown is the Menu File to be used as a source of the drop-down list
items presented in the Valve Configuration window. Menu tables control the content and
order of the menu lists dropped down for operator selection. Browse to enter the desired
Menu File. BenchMark 5.0 will accept BenchMark Version 4.0 Menu Files that have “.DBF”
format. See Appendix “C”, Custom Configuration Menus, for further details.
15. Catalog Table Path: Path shown is the current path to be searched for tables that contain the
contents of drop-down data grids presented in the Valve Configuration window. Browse to
enter the path to the desired Catalog Table path.
16. Standard Rules Path: At the conclusion of the entry of a new valve record, BenchMark 5.0
calculates a set of default Comparative Performance Standards to be associated with the valve
record. Standard Rules Tables are the source of rules and parameters used in those
calculations. Path shown is the current path to be searched for the Standard Rules tables.
Browse to enter the path to the desired Standard Rules Path.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-10


Configure System

Set System Units

Figure 16.8
System
Configuration
-
Set System
Units
Steps to Proceed
1. Set the Engineering Units option to the desired System Units: U.S. (English) or Metric (SI).
2. BenchMark 5.0 test data are recorded in the current System Units at the time of testing. A
Units field in each data table indicates the units of the data. When recovered, stored data are
converted as necessary for display in the current System Units using these conversion factors:
Parameter US SI Conversion Multiplier
Signal Units mA mA 1.000 000 000
Length in mm 25.400 000 000
Area in2 mm2 645.160 000 000
Pressure psi kPa 6.894 757 293
Force lbf N 4.448 221 615
Torque in-lbf N-m 0.112 984 829
Seatload lbf/in N/mm 0.175 126 835
Springrate lbf/in N/mm 0.175 126 835
3. The underlying test data are always maintained in original units. Valve Configuration,
Application and Performance Standard records are maintained in original units unless the
“\BIN\BMARK_V.INI” switch [SYSTEM] PRESERVE_FLAG is set to NO. In that case, records
will be saved in the current system units.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-11


Configure System

System Options

Figure 16.9
System
Configuration
-
System
Options
Steps to Proceed:
1. Use the Systems Options tab to change default system settings.
2. Pass / Fail Analysis: At the conclusion of each test, results can be compared to default or
customized with the Comparative Performance Standards to determine the acceptability of
valve performance. This feature is activated by selecting Enabled. Select Disabled for no
results comparison. Standards can also be disabled individually. See Chapter 14, Test
Standards for more details.
3. Set Default Pass / Fail Performance Standards By: BenchMark 5.0 allows the operator to
designate special criteria for the calculation of the Default Comparative Standards. Select the
basis for the default Comparative Performance Standards by selecting: Defaults (based on
Default Performance Standards), Customer (based on Valve Identification Information) or
Valve Configuration (based on the valve configuration). See Appendix “E”, Default Standards
Calculation for more information.
4. Hardcopy Output: If the system is connected to a color capable printer, the proper drivers
are installed and the test results are to be printed in color, select Color; otherwise, select
Black / White for black text and graphics on white backgrounds. Monochrome outputs
generally print faster than color outputs.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-12


Configure System

System Options (continued)


5. Activity Log File: Browse to identify the storage path for Activity Log Files created. Select
Begin Diagnostics Log at Startup to automatically begin logging work activities at the start of
the BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ application. Select Auto Save if you want the
Activity Log File automatically saved to the storage path before the application closes.
6. Diagnostic Reference Path: BenchMark 5.0 automatically links to the BenchMark Diagnostic
Reference DRx application if it is currently available on the test computer. Browse to identify
the Diagnostic Reference DRx application path to re-establish this link if the storage location
of the DRx application should change.
7. Baseline Test Ramp Duration: Select “Auto” for automatic Baseline ramp time selection
based on the configuration of the current valve; otherwise, select “Manual” to activate the
entry field to manually enter this test parameter.
8. Hold Time: Select “Auto” for automatic stabilization time selection based on the
configuration of the current valve; otherwise, select “Manual” to activate the text field and
enter this test parameter manually.
9. Rotary Transducer Settings: During the testing of rotary valves, BenchMark 5.0 converts the
linear transducer cable motion into a measurement of shaft rotation. The conversion factor
used is based on the diameter of the rotary attachment to the valve shaft. If the Standard
BenchMark Shaft Adapter (2.50 inch diameter) is used, select “Auto”. If another attachment
is used or the linear transducer cable is attached directly to the rotary shaft, select “Manual”.
Enter the diameter (current length units) of the non-standard rotary attachment in the text
box provided.
10. Test Smart Valves Using Digital Control Signal: If the test system is equipped with a
BenchMark digital device interface PC card and it is desirable to communicate digitally with
valves equipped with “Smart” positioners, select “YES”. To communicate with these devices
using the standard analog current control signal, select “NO”. This selection only affects
valves with positioners designated as “DIGITAL” or “SMART” in the valve configuration
record.
11. Signal Source Nominals (I/P): When testing a P/P configured valve, it is necessary to connect
an operator supplied I/P transducer to generate the required pressure control signal. Enter
the nominal output range for the operator supplied I/P transducer in the fields provided.
BenchMark 5.0 will automatically adjust the current range input to the operator supplied I/P
transducer to create the required P/P range.
12. Press Save [S] to apply the changes, which will make the new settings the default settings for
system startup. Press Cancel [C] to abandon the changes and return to the previous settings.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-13


Configure System

System Information

Figure 16.10
System
Configuration
-
System
Information

Steps to Proceed:
1. Use the Systems Information tab to change select default system information.
2. System Information: Licensed Owner, Serial Number, Software Version and Installation Date
are shown for operator reference. These fields are the only non-editable fields on this tab.
Contact Black Diamond Engineering™ if you need to change these fields.
3. System Designation is the key component of the assigned test numbers and is an editable
field. Test numbers are a total of eight (8) characters and numbers in the following format:
[Test Symbol] + [Last Digit of Year] + [Sequence Number, ####] + [System Designation]
4. The combination of characters and numbers provides for 1296 unique identifications for the
test system. Care should be taken to set the unique designations for each BenchMark test
system deployed. This will prevent the creation of duplicated test numbers and allow for the
successful combination of data from multiple test systems.
5. Company Name: Service provider company name as it will be displayed on the cover sheet
of the standard report; text field, 50 characters maximum length.
6. Address: Service provider address as it will be displayed on the cover sheet of the standard
report; text field, 50 characters maximum length.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-14


Configure System

System Information (continued)


7. City: Service provider city name as it will be displayed on the cover sheet of the standard
report; text field, 50 characters maximum length.
8. State/Province: Service provider state or province name as it will be displayed on the cover
sheet of the standard report; text field, 25 characters maximum length.
9. Zip code: Service provider Zip code or postal code as it will be displayed on the cover sheet
of the standard report; text field, 12 characters maximum length.
10. Country: Service provider country or nation name as it will be displayed on the cover sheet
of the standard report; text field, 50 characters maximum length.
11. Telephone: Service provider telephone number as it will be displayed on the cover sheet of
the standard report; text field, 20 characters maximum length.
12. Fax: Service provider facsimile (fax) number as it will be displayed on the cover sheet of the
standard report; text field, 20 characters maximum length.
13. Website: Service provider website URL as it will be displayed on the cover sheet of the
standard report; text field, 50 characters maximum length.
14. Operator Name: Service provider technician name as it will be displayed on the cover sheet
of the standard report; text field, 25 characters maximum length.
15. Press PREVIEW [P] to open a Preview Window and display the changes as they will appear
on the coversheet.
16. Click on the CLOSE [X] button at the upper right-hand corner of the report window to return
to the Configure System window.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-15


Configure System

Customer Path Options

Figure 16.11
Customer
Path Options

Steps to Proceed:
1. Use the Customer Path Options tab to change the rules for automatically creating data record
paths based on customer information.
2. Allow Customer Base Paths: Select YES to enable this function or NO to disable it. If this
function is enabled the entry fields on this tab are also enabled.
3. Default Logical Device: Browse to select the logical device (drive) to place any newly
created customer based path.
4. The Available Elements list box contains the customer information elements that may be used
to develop the new path. Select desired elements and move them into the Build Order list
box in the order in which they are to be added to the path.
5. Press VIEW [V] to display an illustration of the newly created customer path in the Path
Schematic-Illustration field. This view is for illustration purposes only. In the actual path
created (See Chapter 5, Locate Record for more details), the actual entries for the customer
will be placed where the generic element names are displayed.
6. Browse to identify primary and secondary Menu Files to be copied onto the new path when
it is created.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 16-16


17
Troubleshooting

Page

Overview 17-1
Problems and Check Lists 17-2
Customer Service 17-6
Troubleshooting

Overview
This chapter deals with troubleshooting problems associated with BenchMark Control Valve
Diagnostics™. It does not deal with resolving problems with the control valves tested.
Technical Service bulletins and consulting services are available to assist in the diagnosis and
resolution of control valve problems. Please contact Black Diamond Engineering for further
assistance.
If you are experiencing a technical problem with your BenchMark 5.0 system, please carefully
review the information contained in this chapter before calling the manufacturer. It has been our
experience that many of the problems typically encountered can be quickly resolved. In this
section, many of the commonly encountered problems are discussed along with suggested steps
to resolve them. Solutions listed are in the general order of likelihood.
In the event that the solutions offered do not resolve the problem, refer to the Customer Service
Section of this chapter.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 17-1


Troubleshooting

Problems and Checklists

#1: Computer will not boot up.


1. Verify that the A/C adapter is plugged into an active outlet of the correct voltage.
2. Verify that the green light on the adapter box is lighted.
3. If the battery is discharged, connect the A/C adapter and re-charge.
4. Undo any modifications to the BIOS or operating system of the computer.
5. If the computer has been struck or dropped, call Black Diamond Engineering
Customer Service for assistance.
6. If the computer case has been opened or modified in any way, call Black Diamond
Engineering Customer Service for assistance.

#2: An irregularity is indicated in the system registration.

1. Exit Windows™ normally, power off. Power on and reboot the computer.
2. Enter the information requested by consulting the Individual License Certificate
provided with the system at delivery.
3. Call Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service for assistance.

#3: BenchMark 5.0 indicates system calibration error.


1. If it has been longer than 12 months since the data acquisition and control system
has been calibrated, re-calibrate the system. Call Black Diamond Engineering
Customer Service for assistance.
2. If the Owner Data Table has been modified or deleted, restore to prior condition.
3. Call Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service for assistance.

#4: BenchMark 5.0 indicates a transducer calibration error.


1. Check the calibration date and calibration interval on the transducer in question. If
the transducer is out of calibration, re-calibrate and update the TRANSCAL Data
Table. Call Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service for assistance.
2. If the TRANSCAL Data Table has been modified or deleted restore to prior
condition.
3. Call Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service for assistance.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 17-2


Troubleshooting

Problems and Checklists (continued)

#5: BenchMark 5.0 error during data acquisition system ‘self test’.
1. Record the error message; exit BenchMark 5.0 normally and close Windows™.
Power off the computer. Contact Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service.

#6: BenchMark 5.0 indicates a table is Not in expected format.


1. If the data tables have been modified, restore them to prior condition.
2. If the battery has discharged, allow the computer to power off because of low
battery voltage; call Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service for assistance.
3. If the computer has been turned off without following the recommended
procedures for closing Windows™, call Black Diamond Engineering Customer
Service for assistance.

#7: BenchMark 5.0 indicates valve is being sent a mid-span (50%) control signal;
however, valve does not move.
1. Verify that the signal cable is attached to the I/P or pressure source. Do not attach
the signal cable to loose screws on the I/P terminal block.
2. Check the polarity of connections to the I/P; verify that the wires are not shorted.
3. Verify that the signal cable is properly connected to the Interconnect Box.
4. Verify that the Interconnect Box is properly connected to the test computer. If it is
disconnected, power off the computer before reconnecting.
5. Verify that the air supply pressure is connected to both the valve and the I/P
transducer and that there are no leaks.
6. Exit all open applications, close Windows™ and power off the computer. Re-check
all connections and restart the computer.
7. Check the I/P function; try an alternate I/P transducer.
8. Check the positioner carefully for function.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 17-3


Troubleshooting

Problems and Checklists (continued)

#8: BenchMark 5.0 indicates valve is being sent a mid-span (50%) control signal;
valve moves but does not move to mid stroke.
1. Check to see if the positioner is in extreme error or is malfunctioning. Re-calibrate
or replace as needed.
2. Verify that the positioner is receiving full air supply pressure. Adjust as necessary.
3. Verify that the valve signal range has been correctly entered. Enter the correct range
as described in Chapter 6, Valve Configuration.
4. Verify the control signal output with milli-ammeter. If output is in error, contact
Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service.

#9: Displacement Transducer output doesn’t change, or stops suddenly.


1. Verify that the displacement transducer feedback cable is connected to the feedback
arm. Verify that the feedback arm is properly attached to the valve stem. Re-attach
as necessary.
2. Verify that the displacement transducer cable is mounted, such that the cable does
not become slack anywhere in the stroke. Adjust the transducer mounting as
necessary.
3. Verify that the displacement transducer electrical signal cable is connected to the
transducer. Verify that the signal cable is properly connected to the Interconnect
Box. Connect as necessary.
4. Verify that the Interconnect Box is properly connected to the test computer. If it is
disconnected, power off the computer before reconnecting.
5. Verify that the proper displacement transducer is included in the Active Transducer
Set. Configure the system as described in Chapter 16, Configure System.
6. Verify that the displacement transducer is functioning properly by substituting an
alternate displacement transducer. If the transducer does not appear to be
functioning properly contact Black Diamond Engineering Customer Service for
assistance.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 17-4


Troubleshooting

Problems and Checklists (continued)


#10: Stroke length indicated is not the expected length or test results show
abnormal displacement during the ramp.
1. Verify that the proper range displacement transducer has been selected. Apply a
transducer with a range larger than the expected stroke of the valve.
2. Verify that the valve stroke entered is correct for the valve. Verify the valve
information by inspecting the identification tag or by the physical inspection of the
valve.
3. Verify that the feedback arm is connected so that its travel is equal to the valve
travel. Check carefully for obstruction or contact with the yoke. Adjust as necessary
for free unrestricted motion.
4. Verify that the displacement transducer cable does not become slack anywhere in
the normal stroke of the valve.
5. Verify that the valve is capable of moving the full rated stroke length.
6. Check the I/P function; try an alternate I/P transducer.
7. Check the positioner carefully for proper function.

#11: Units displayed on display, graph or on test report are wrong for the valve
being tested.
1. Verify that the proper valve configuration, linear or rotary, has been entered.
Change the valve configuration per Chapter 6, Valve Configuration.

#12: Travel direction displayed on display, graph or on test report are wrong for
the valve being tested.
1. Verify that the proper air action, ATO (air to open) or ATC (air to close) has been
entered. Change the air action per Chapter 6, Valve Configuration.

#13: BenchMark indicates it cannot locate test data during the presentation of
graphs.
1. Data file has been moved from its original storage location, deleted or damaged.
Use the browse function offered to identify correct location of the data file.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 17-5


Troubleshooting

Customer Service
About Your Call
Black Diamond Engineering has available telephone, fax and e-mail assistance for purchasers and
lessees of BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™.
Factory engineers and technicians are available to assist you in hardware and software problem-
solving. Technical support services are available to assist you in the diagnosis of valve problems.
Contact Customer Service for a prompt quotation.

Who to Call
For assistance, please call 1 801 256-0202, 8 am to 5 pm, Mountain Time, Monday through
Friday excluding holidays. Twenty four hour access is available by special arrangement.
You may also reach us by fax at 1 801 256-0217. A customer service representative will contact
you promptly. Be sure to include a description of your situation and sufficient information in your
fax for us to contact you.
You may also reach us via e-mail through the World Wide Web. Address your e-mail to
customerservice @ blkdmdeng.com.
When you contact us, please have the following information available:
1. System Serial Number
2. Date of Purchase
3. Service Contract Number
4. Individual License Certificate
5. Software Version Number
6. Fax Number at your location.

Be certain to advise the service representative if your system is covered by a Maintenance


Contract. Specific terms of the contract may vary, but you may be eligible for a temporary
replacement unit and / or components while repairs are being undertaken.
Prior to returning any equipment for service, calibration or repair, please contact us and request a
“Return Materials Authorization” (RMA). This will help us properly track your shipment and
provide you with the timely service that you need. This procedure applies to all returns, warranty
or otherwise. You will be given specific information to ensure that the equipment is packaged
and shipped correctly.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 17-6


18
Glossary

Page
Definition of Technical Terms 18-1
Definition of Reported Parameters
Baseline 18-16
HDRL 18-19
DeadBand 18-20
Step Utility 18-21
Step Response 18-23
Sensitivity 18-25
Resolution 18-26
Frequency Response 18-27
Glossary

Definition of Technical Terms


A/C ADAPTER: Transformer device used to convert A/C electricity to the proper DC voltage
required to power the test computer.
ABSOLUTE DEVIATION: Error expressed in the units measured.
ACCURACY: The degree of conformity of an indicated value to an ideal value.
ACKNOWLEDGED: Recognized or Accepted.
ACTIVE TRANSDUCER SET: The transducers required by the test system to perform the Baseline
test: Displacement, Signal Pressure, Actuator Pressure for single acting actuators or Top Pressure
and Bottom Pressure for double acting actuators, and Supply Pressure.
ACTUATOR EFFECTIVE AREA: Portion of actuator area that produces stem force.
ACTUATOR MANUFACTURER: The producer of the valve positioning system.
ACTUATOR MODEL: The manufacturer’s designation or class for the actuator.
ACTUATOR PRESSURE: The pressure present at the inlet to the actuator piston.
ACTUATOR STYLE, Double or Single Acting: A single acting actuator (diaphragm) that uses air
pressure acting against a spring force to move the valve control element. A double acting actuator
(piston) uses differential pressure acting on both sides of a piston to move the valve control
element.
AIR ACTION: AIR-TO-CLOSE (ATC): Increase in control input signal results in a corresponding
stem (shaft) travel (rotation) towards the seat.
AIR ACTION: AIR-TO-OPEN (ATO): Increase in control input signal that results in a
corresponding stem (shaft) travel (rotation) away from the seat.
ALLOWABLE SPL: Allowable Sound Pressure Level or acoustic noise.
ALTERNATE SERIAL NUMBER: A number applied to the control valve by the plant maintenance
staff or repair contractor for tracking purposes.
ALTERNATE SHORT-CUT KEYSTROKES: While using the GUI, an operator may prefer to use a
keystroke to enter a command or “click” a control. To allow this, most command keys have an
underlined letter in the command title that indicates the letter when accompanied by the ALT
key that will actuate that command. For instance, a command key labeled “Continue” will
actuate by the short-cut keystroke “ALT” + “C“.
AMPLITUDE: The peak to peak value of a waveform or periodic function.
ANNOTATE: To mark or label. To add notes or other descriptive information to a document or
figure.
ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
ATTENUATION: The decrease in signal magnitude between two frequencies.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-1


Glossary

BALANCE PRESSURE: Average of top and bottom cylinder pressure of a double-acting actuator.
BALANCED / UNBALANCED: Balanced; a valve trim design which enables the inlet pressure to
act on both sides of the plug head thereby reducing the force required to move the plug.
Unbalanced, does not have this design feature.
BASELINE TEST: The primary screening test of BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™. From a
single calibration cycle performed at near quasi-static rates, thirty one (31) significant performance
parameters and determinations of overall stroking smoothness and seating can be determined.
BENCHMARK DATA MGR: A software tool provided by Black Diamond Engineering for
advanced data management, review and trending of BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ data.
BENCHMARK DIAGNOSTIC REFERENCE: A software tool provided by Black Diamond
Engineering that links Baseline Test Results to a valve diagnostic and troubleshooting guide.
BENCHMARK LINK MGR: A software tool, provided by Black Diamond Engineering, for
advanced management of BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostics™ valve and test records on
multiple platforms.
BENCHSET: The high and low values of pressure applied to a single-acting actuator to produce
the nominal valve travel with no external forces present on the actuator stem. Measured from the
upper actuator travel stop down to the nominal travel for the valve.
BIOS: Basic Input / Output System, part of the PC computer operating system.
BLACK DIAMOND ENGINEERING: Developer and manufacturer of BenchMark Control Valve
Diagnostics™ and related software tools.
BODY SIZE: The nominal dimension of the valve inlet port diameter.
BOOSTERS / QE: Boosters are air flow amplifiers attached to a port or ports on an actuator.
These devices increase the rate of air flow, thereby increasing actuator speed. Quick Exhaust
valves reduce air pressure rapidly in one side of a double acting actuator increasing the pressure
differential and the piston speed.
BOTTOM CYLINDER AREA: The effective area of the cylinder side closest to the valve of the
double acting actuator. This side normally contains the actuator stem.
CALIBRATE: To adjust the output of a device such that it corresponds to the ideal response,
within a tolerance band, for given inputs over its span.
CATALOG PATH: Current Windows™ path to the BenchMark standard catalog tables. Used as a
data source for drop-down grid selection in Configuration function.
COLOR CODE: Each BenchMark transducer is identified by a unique color band and label – its
color code.
COMPANY: The end-user or owner of the valve being tested.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-2


Glossary

CONTROL LOOP: In this context, system where a controller using measurements of a process
variable from one or more transducers actively guides or manipulates the control valve to achieve
a prescribed value of the measured variable.
CONTROL SIGNAL: The milliamp signal sent to the I/P transducer controlling the valve by the
control room or the BenchMark test system.
CRITICAL PRESSURE: Process media parameter. The pressure of a vapor at its critical point, i.e.
point where the liquid phase and vapor phase become identical.
CRITICAL TEMPERATURE: Process media parameter. The maximum temperature at which a gas
or vapor may be liquefied by the application of pressure alone.
CURRENT VALVE RECORD: The record located and loaded at the onset of BenchMark testing.
All subsequent tests have access to all of the valves information and all testing is registered or
logged against the current valve’s tagnumber, manufacturer’s serial number and alternate serial
number
CUSTOMER ID#: A designation to identify Customer provided by the system owner. A key used
to identify a customer record for data path management.
Cv: A sizing coefficient used to determine the flow capacity of a valve.
DAC: Abbreviation for Data Acquisition Card.
DATA ENTRY MENU, Primary or secondary: A BenchMark option to load customizable list
entries into valve configuration window list boxes. Menus can be edited using a word processor or
text editor.
DATA FILE PATH: The Windows™ path where the test graph data are stored.
DATA MGR: (BenchMark Data MGR) A software tool provided by Black Diamond Engineering for
advanced data management, review and trending of BenchMark Control Valve Diagnostic™ data.
DATA TABLE GRID: A method of displaying the contents of a data table in a row and column
format where the rows are the individual records of the table and the columns are the fields or
attributes. Visually very similar to a spreadsheet display.
DATA TABLE: A collection of records that have some underlying relationship with one another.
For example, a Valve Identification Table holds Identification records for a variety of valves. Table
records have identical format and variable content.
DATABASE: A group or collection of one or more data tables that are relevant to one another
because of the application or purpose of the software. For example, BenchMark coordinates a
number of data tables containing valve records, system records and test results to minimize the
operator’s clerical work and to maximize the access and usefulness of stored data by powerful
reporting and search tools.
DEAD TIME: Time between signal change and a threshold change in displacement.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-3


Glossary

DEADBAND: The range through which an input can be varied, upon reversal of direction,
without initiating a change in output.
DEADBAND TEST: BenchMark test evaluates quasi-static Deadband by giving the valve a series
of small control steps in each direction and determining when actual measurable response occurs.
Procedures are based on ISA-S75.13-1989, Method of Evaluating the Performance of Positioners
with Analog Input Signals and Pneumatic Output.
DEFAULT: A default in this context is a pre-loaded response to a software request for data or
information. It is a response that the software uses automatically, if the operator does not enter
different data.
DELTA PRESSURE: The difference between inlet and outlet pressures.
DIAGNOSTIC: A procedure or test designed to reveal if problems exist and to determine the
underlying causes or sources.
DIAGNOSTIC REFERENCE: (BenchMark Diagnostic Reference) A software tool provided by
Black Diamond Engineering that links Baseline Test Results to a valve diagnostic and
troubleshooting guide.
DISPLACEMENT TRANSDUCER: A transducer that converts motion into an output representing
distance, movement or travel.
DOUBLE ACTING ACTUATOR: An actuator that in normal operation has pressure acting on
both sides of a piston within the bore of a cylinder. It requires the use of a valve positioner.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE: The output behavior of a device as a function of the input with respect to
time.
END CONNECT: The type of end treatment needed to mate up to the pipeline. Typical options
include flanged ends, socket weld or butt weld ends.
END FACING: Finish quality required on the gasket mating surface of the valve.
EXPORT: Ability to move data from one application easily and conveniently to another with the
format translation handled automatically by the current program.
FAIL CLOSED: Failure condition; valve port to close upon loss of air supply.
FAIL MODE: The behavior of the plug upon loss of air supply.
FAIL OPEN: Failure condition; valve port to open upon loss of air supply.
FIELD: One individual piece of data. It can be Alpha (Characters), Numeric (Numbers, Integer or
Real), Logical (True or False, Yes or No) or Memo (text). Sometimes referred to as an attribute.
Example: the valve Tagnumber is a field.
FIND: A tool that searches for records within a data table that meet specified parameters. The
records that meet the criteria are selected.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-4


Glossary

FLOW CHARACTERISTIC: General indication of the change in flow through the valve caused by
a change in stroke. Typically, equal percent or linear.
FLOW DIRECTION: The direction of fluid or gas flow with respect to the plug head. Flow over
indicates that the inlet pressure acts to close the valve. Flow under indicates the inlet pressure
acts to open the valve.
FLOW RATE: The amount of fluid or gas handled by the valve in a period of time. Can be mass
or volume based.
FREQUENCY: The rate at which the input signal sine wave changes amplitude. The inverse of the
period, the time to complete one sinusoid (cycle).
FREQUENCY RESPONSE: The frequency-dependent relationship of amplitude and phase
between a steady state sinusoidal input and the resulting output of the device.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE TEST: BenchMark test evaluates valves response to a variable frequency
sinusoidal input signal. Input signal is evaluated over one decade of frequency and at two
amplitudes, 10 and 2 % peak to peak. Procedures are based on ISA-S75.13-1989, Method of
Evaluating the Performance of Positioners with Analog Input Signals and Pneumatic Output.
FRICTION, AVERAGE: Average value of friction measured during valve motion in a ramped
calibration cycle.
FRICTION, MAXIMUM: Maximum value of friction measured during valve motion in a ramped
calibration cycle.
GAIN: The magnitude ratio of a system output to the system input.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI): Screen style and entry technique of Windows™ and similar
PC Software. Entry is both by keyboard and by a pointing device, commonly a mouse, trackball or
a touch-pad. This technique creates a very natural, intuitive entry and provides screen elements
that respond to the operator, e.g. ‘click’ a control button and see the button depress on the
screen.
HARDCOPY: To print using the system printer.
HDRL: Abbreviation for Hysteresis+Deadband, Repeatability and Linearity Test.
HDRL TEST: The BenchMark HDRL test procedures are based on ISA-S75.13-1989, Method of
Evaluating the Performance of Positioners with Analog Input Signals and Pneumatic Output. This
test determines both average and maximum values of Hysteresis + Deadband and Repeatability
Error.
HOLDTIME: The time in seconds that the control valve is allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded during a test. This pause ensures that the valve is
finished moving. Set either automatically or manually. See Chapter 16, Configure System for
more details.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-5


Glossary

HYSTERESIS + DEADBAND: The absolute difference between response values at the same
measurement signal but after approaching from opposite directions, i.e. upscale and downscale
calibration cycles. Since the test involves a reversal of motion, the value inherently contains
Deadband. Maximum value reported as a percentage of calibration span, although the average
value warrants examination.
IMPROVED REPAIR CYCLE: A control valve repair scenario where improved diagnostics and
record sharing between valve end-user and repair vendor increase productivity and reduce costs.
INBOX: A directory located on the Data Record Path where incoming data files from external
applications are placed. BenchMark examines this path for Task Files.
INI FILE FORMAT: A commonly used term for Windows™ Private Profile Files.
I/P TRANSDUCER: Current to pneumatic signal converter. Also called “I/P”.
ICON: In this context, a symbol or picture used to represent a device or component. BenchMark
uses a symbol of the Interconnect Box for a visual reference during setup.
INDIVIDUAL LICENSE CERTIFICATE: A certificate provided to the owner of the licensed
installation of BenchMark software that contains important information necessary to re-install the
software and verify ownership.
INLET PRESSURE: The pressure measured at the inlet to the valve body.
IN-LINE: Currently installed in the process loop, as in a valve that is in-line.
IN-SERVICE: Currently pressurized and in active service within the process loop.
INSTALLATION ORIENTATION: The physical orientation of the control valve as it is installed.
Usually horizontal, vertical or inclined.
INSULATION THICKNESS: The radial thickness of insulation installed on the pipeline.
INSULATION TYPE: The material or composition of the insulation used on the pipeline to
minimize noise or heat transfer.
INTERCONNECT BOX: BenchMark interface between the transducers and the test computer.
Transducers are connected by referring to the label or icon provided.
KILOPASCAL: (kPa) SI unit of pressure equaling 100 Pascal or 0.145 psi.
LINEAR VALVE CONFIGURATION: A valve in which the stem moves in a sliding or linear motion
to modify the amount of fluid passing through the valve.
LINEARITY, BSL (Best Straight Line): The maximum deviation of the calibration curve (average of
upscale and downscale readings) from a best fit straight line. Usually reported as the maximum
value expressed as a percent of calibration span.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-6


Glossary

LOOP IMPORTANCE: An indication of how effectively this control loop has to function. Loops
with safety implications or significant quality and economic influence on overall plant performance
may have greater importance than other control loops. Used in the post test assessments of valve
performance.
LOOP TIME CONSTANT: In response to a step input change, the time in seconds for the loop to
achieve 63.2 % of its final steady state response.
LOOP TYPE: Type of process variable being controlled, e.g. pressure, level or flow.
MAINTENANCE CONTRACT: A contractual arrangement between the system owner and the
Black Diamond Engineering providing for no charge technical support, no-charge software
upgrades and extensions of the basic hardware warranty for the term of the contract.
MANUFACTURER: See valve manufacturer or actuator manufacturer.
MANUFACTURER’S SERIAL NUMBER: Valve designation assigned by the valve manufacturer
during the original manufacture of the valve.
MATERIAL CERTIFICATION: A standard invoked to describe material requirements and
specifications to be followed.
MAXIMUM BENCHSET: Actuator pressure measured at the point of maximum measured travel.
MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL: Maximum signal in milliamps (ma) over which the valve is to
operate, i.e. a 4-20 ma valve has a maximum input signal of 20 ma.
MAXIMUM PRESSURE RATING: Maximum pressure that the valve is expected to see during
operational life.
MAXIMUM STANDARD: A level or amount which is not to be exceeded normally.
MAXIMUM TRAVEL: The maximum physical displacement of the plug away from the seat.
Generally the distance from the seat contact to the contact with a back stop in the valve or
actuator.
MEASURED (TRAVEL) SPAN: The absolute difference between travel measured over the nominal
I/P input signal range.
MEASURED TOTAL TRAVEL: The measured travel expressed as the absolute difference between
end-scale values.
MENU FILE: A data table containing the menu list contents used in the Configuration function.
METER: (m) SI unit of distance, equal to 39.5 inches.
MEMO FIELD: A database field that contains variable length text.
METRIC: International System (SI) of units.
MFGR. SPECIFIED FRICTION: The manufacturer’s estimate of friction in the valve based on the
type of packing, valve configuration and actuator.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-7


Glossary

MA: See milliamp.


MILLIAMP: (mA) One thousandth part of an ampere.
MILLIMETER: (mm) One thousandth part of a meter.
MINIMUM AIR PRESSURE: The lowest air supply pressure needed by the valve actuator for
proper operation.
MINIMUM BENCHSET: Actuator pressure as measured at the point equivalent to the maximum
travel minus the nominal travel.
MINIMUM INPUT SIGNAL: The minimum signal in milli-amps (ma) over which the valve is to
operate, i.e. a 4-20 ma valve has a minimum input signal of 4 ma.
MINIMUM STANDARD: The lowest level or least amount acceptable for normal operation.
MODEL: See Valve Model or Actuator Model
N: (Newton): See NEWTON
NEC: National Electrical Code published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
NEC AREA CLASS: Hazardous area rating per the National Electrical Code.
NEC DIVISION: Hazardous division rating per the National Electrical Code.
NEC GROUP: Hazardous group rating per the National Electrical Code.
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
NEWTON: SI unit of force, equal to 0.2248 lbfs, approximately.
NOMINAL (NOM): The desired value within a range of values. For example, if the acceptable
values is specified as 100 ± 10, the maximum is 110, the minimum is 90 and the nominal is 100.
NOMINAL (VALVE) STROKE: Manufacturer’s rated (design) valve stroke or travel.
NOMINAL STANDARD: See Nominal (Nom).
NOMINAL STROKE: The manufacturer rated stroke where 100% Cv is achieved.
OFFSET: Position in span corresponding to the input signal, i.e. a valve sent a 50% input signal
should move to a 50% offset (mid-span).
ON-LINE: Currently pressurized and in active service within the process loop.
OPERATOR NAME: The name of the BenchMark system current operator.
OUTBOX: A directory located on the Data Record Path where outgoing data files from
BenchMark are placed for access by external applications.
OVERSHOOT: The maximum transient travel beyond the steady state travel as a result of a step
change.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-8


Glossary

OWNER INFORMATION TABLE: BenchMark data table OWNER.


PACKING MATERIAL: Composition of the material found in the packing box that forms the seal
against the valve stem. Typical materials are PTFE, Grafoil™ and AFPI.
PACKING TYPE: The basic configuration of the packing material. Typical types are twin, vacuum,
standard, etc.
P AND I DWG#: Process and Instrumentation Drawing number.
PARAMETER: An engineering measurement that characterizes performance.
PASS / FAIL: A status determination following a comparison to a standard. If the value measured
is within the standard window the status is pass, otherwise fail.
PASSIVE MONITORING: Collection of data from a valve that does not include any signal input
from BenchMark. Used primarily to collect information from an in-service valve or to document ‘as
found’ function.
PATH: A complete Windows™ specification of the logical device (drive), directories (folders), sub-
directories where a file is located or is to be located.
PBAL SEAL MATERIAL: Type of material used in pressure balance seals.
PERCENT DEVIATION: Error expressed as a percentage of full span.
PHASE LAG: Amount that the valve travel lags or trails the sinusoidal input signal. Usually
expressed, in degrees, as a portion of a full cycle (360 degrees).
PIPE SIZE: The nominal diameter of the pipeline in which the valve is installed.
PIPELINE INSTALLATION: The orientation of the valve as installed in the line.
PLANT LOCATION: The physical or geographical location of the plant.
PLANT NAME: The name of the plant where the valve is located.
POSITIONER: Device that receives either a electronic or pneumatic signal, compares that signal
to the valve stem position and converts that signal to air pressures which are sent to the air
chambers in the actuator.
PRESSURE CLASS: Pressure rating of the valve per ANSI B16.34.
PREVIEW WINDOW: A window containing the image of the report to be printed.
PROCESS MEDIA: The fluid or gas being handled by the valve.
PROCESS VARIABLE: Process parameter that the control system seeks to set and control.
PROFILE FILE: A Windows™ file structure used to hold either public or private application setup
information. Information can be easily located and extracted by any Windows™ programming
language.
PV HIGH LIMIT: The maximum acceptable value of the Process Variable.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-9


Glossary

PV LOW LIMIT: The minimum acceptable value of the Process Variable.


PV UNITS: Physical description of the Process Variable, i.e. psig, gpm etc.
QUASI-STATIC: A rate of motion so slow that the resulting response is as though a state of full
equilibrium has essentially occurred.
QUERY: A temporary set of records defined by a question posed in terms of a Structured Query
Language (SQL) statement.
RAMPTIME: Time in seconds to complete either the increasing or decreasing portion of the
calibration cycle. Total test time is approximately twice ramp time.
RANGE: The span or region over which a quantity is measured.
RATED CV: The value of Cv at the rated full open or nominal stroke position.
REAL-TIME: Performed contemporaneously, done at the same time.
RECORD: In a data table, a record is a complete unit of related information. Each record is an
electronic file folder containing fields with an immediate relevance to one another. For example,
the valve identification record contains data identifying one individual valve.
REFERENCE: Establish the zero or datum position at the seat and determine the proper scale
factor sign such that displacements away from the seat are positive. All displacements in the
BenchMark system are referenced this way to eliminate confusion when displaying the motion of
air to open and air to close valves.
REPEATABILITY: The absolute difference between response values occurring as a result of
measurement on successive cycles. Usually reported as the maximum value expressed as a percent
of calibration span, although the average value warrants examination.
REPORT LANGUAGE: Output Reports can be printed in several languages. The Report Language
can be selected from the Configure System function.
REPORT PREVIEW: A window containing the image of the report to be printed.
REPORT TOOLS: BenchMark function that manages the printing and exporting of standard test
reports and the recall of test results.
RESOLUTION: (BenchMark definition) Input resolution is the smallest change in input that a
valve will recognize when the signal changes include reversals across the Deadband.
RESOLUTION TEST: BenchMark test evaluates the valves ability to respond to progressively
decreasing steps, 5, 2.5, 1 and 0.5 percent, that reverse direction and cause the valve to cross the
Deadband. This control simulation evaluates the ability of the valve to respond to dithering steps
about a set point.
RESPONSE TIME: In response to a step input, the time between signal change and the valve
reaching 63.2% of the final steady state travel

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-10


Glossary

RETURN MATERIALS AUTHORIZATION: The number used by the manufacture to track


materials and equipment returned for calibration, service or repair.
RE-ZERO: To set the current value as the datum and assign it the value “0”.
RISE TIME: In response to a step input, time required for valve to travel from 10% to 90% of the
final steady state travel.
RISK CLASS: An indication of the safety implications of a valve malfunction.
ROTARY REFERENCE DIAMETER: During rotary valve testing, a collar attached to the rotating
shaft winds the cable from the displacement transducer. The diameter of the collar is used to
calculate the shaft rotation angle from the observed extension or retraction measured by the
displacement transducer by the expression: θ = (360*L) / (πD) where L = Measured Length; D =
Rotary Reference Diameter and θ = Shaft Rotation.
ROTARY VALVE CONFIGURATION: Rotary describes a configuration in which the shaft of the
valve is rotated in the flow stream to modify flow rate.
SATURATION: Describes condition where the signal is at the absolute minimum or maximum
value causing the actuator pressure(s) to be either completely full or completely exhausted of air.
SCALE FACTOR: The factor by which the transducer response, in this case electrical signal must
be multiplied to compute the value of the measured response in engineering units.
SCHEDULE: Pipe pressure rating per ANSI B36.10 and B39.19.
SCROLL BARS: The shaded bars along the right side and bottom of a window. To scroll to
another location in the window, drag the box with the pointer or click on the arrows in the scroll bar.
SEAT (ORIFICE) DIAMETER: The diameter of the valve seat or trim.
SEAT ALPHA: Alpha character sometimes used with seat diameter designations.
SEAT LEAK CLASS: Allowable leakage past the seat per ANSI B16.104-1976-FCI70-2.
SEAT LOAD - BENCH: Contact force between valve seat and valve plug on the work bench or
without line pressure in the valve body.
SEAT LOAD - OPERATING: Contact force between valve seat and valve plug at operating
pressures.
SEAT: Part of the valve body which a plug contacts for closure and shut off.
SENSITIVITY: (BenchMark definition) Smallest input signal change that a valve will recognize
when the input signals are in the same direction.
SENSITIVITY TEST: BenchMark test evaluates the valves ability to respond to progressively
decreasing steps, 5, 2.5, 1, and 0.5 percent, in the same direction. Both increasing and decreasing
signals are evaluated. This control simulation evaluates the ability of a valve to respond to the
proportioning signal that occurs as a valve is controlled onto a new set point.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-11


Glossary

SERVICE CONDITIONS: The standard operating conditions of the valve.


SETPOINT: Input variable that establishes the desired value of controlled variable.
SETTLING TIME: The time required for the response to fall and remain within a ± 2% bandwidth
about the steady state response.
SI UNITS: Units of the International System. Typical units include: meter, gram, liter, Newton and
Pascal. Also known as Le Systeme International d’Unites.
SI UNITS SYMBOL: A blue and white SI icon is displayed when the BenchMark system unit’s
selection is set to SI Units.
SIGNAL DIRECTION: The direction of change for the signal.
SIGNAL PRESSURE: The output pressure of the I/P transducer.
SIGNAL RANGE: Normal input signal range of the signal pressure generating instrument (e.g. 4-
20 ma) or input to the pneumatic positioner (e.g. 3-15 psig).
SIGNAL SOURCE: The device producing the control signal pressure to the valve.
SIGNAL SOURCE NOMINALS: The nominal pressure output of the signal source at the
endpoints of the stated range. Example: a 4-20 ma I/P might have Signal Source Nominals of 3 and
15 psi.
SINGLE ACTING ACTUATOR: An actuator that in normal operation has pressure acting on one
side only. It most commonly acts against a spring and employs a diaphragm as a pressure barrier.
SINUSOIDAL: Having the characteristics of a mathematical sine function.
SMART DEVICE: See Smart Positioner.
SMART POSITIONER: A positioner that accepts a digital or combination digital and analog signal
regardless of digital protocol. Characterized by an integrated conversion of the input signal, in
electronic form, into actuator pressure(s).
SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER: The release number of the software. Typically, proceeded by a
v and consisting of numbers and periods, e.g. v 2.50. Displayed on an opening screen.
SORT ORDER: Data is typically in one of two orders: ascending (increasing, lowest to highest,
earliest to latest, first to last, a to z, etc.) or descending (decreasing, highest to lowest, latest to
earliest, last to first, z to a, etc.)
SORT: A method of organizing data within a data table by placing records in order of rank set by
the value of one or more fields that are logically related.
SPAN TRAVEL: The travel measured between the nominal limits of span.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY: The density of a fluid is the ratio of the mass of the fluid to the mass of an
equal volume of water at some standard temperature. The specific gravity of gases is generally
referenced to air or hydrogen.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-12


Glossary

SPRING RATE: Change in spring force per change in spring length.


SPRING: In single-acting actuators, the spring provides force to counteract air pressure from the
opposing air chamber; in dual-acting actuators, the spring provides force for a fail-safe operation.
STABILIZATION TIME: See Holdtime.
STANDARD RULES: Parameters and rules used in the calculation of default performance
standards for a given valve.
STANDARD RULES PATH: Windows™ path to the DFCALC table and other standards tables
containing standard rules and documentation.
STANDARD TEST REPORT: Standard pre-formatted BenchMark Test Report.
STATUS: Pass or Fail based on an arithmetic comparison to a standard.
STEM DIAMETER: Dimension of the rod extending through the bonnet assembly.
STEP RESPONSE TEST: BenchMark test modeled after the recommendations of ISA-S75.13-
1989, Method of Evaluating the Performance of Positioners with Analog Input Signals and
Pneumatic Output. It evaluates the valves dynamic response to 100, 80, 10 and 2 percent steps in
increasing and decreasing directions.
STEP SIZE: The magnitude of the control signal change applied to the valve.
STEP UTILITY TEST: BenchMark utility test that allows the operator to move the control valve in
any step-size, increasing or decreasing signal, from any location in span. The dynamic response
can then be analyzed and reported.
STRUCTURED QUERY LANGUAGE (SQL): Software language used to query, update and
manage relational databases. Microsoft Access SQL is used with BenchMark and is derived from
ANSI-86, ANSI-89 and ANSI-92.
SUPPLY PRESSURE: The pressure at the supply port of the positioner.
SYSTEM CALIBRATION REPORT: A Standard BenchMark report summarizing the transducers
used and their calibration data.
SYSTEM DESIGNATION: A two element character field in the Owner data table that allows up
to 1296 unique identifications for the test system.
TAB DELIMITED FORMAT: A text file format where the data columns are separated by a [TAB]
entry. Well suited to importation into PC spreadsheet programs.
TABLES: See data tables
TABLE MGR: (BenchMark Table MGR) A software tool provided by Black Diamond Engineering
for advanced data management of data, catalog, and menu tables used in BenchMark Control
Valve Diagnostics™.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-13


Glossary

TAGNUMBER: The designation, given the control valve, on the Process and Instrumentation
drawing for the process or unit. Used as a primary identification field in BenchMark.
TASK FILE: An import file placed into the INBOX directory of the Data Record Path. The file has
the Private Profile File structure and is used for the exchange of data with other applications.
TEST DURATION: Length of time that data is recorded during a test procedure.
TEST HISTORY DATA TABLE: At the conclusion of each test, a record is entered into a data
table Thistory that documents the date, time, operator, data storage location and other data
relevant to the performance of the test. This log is used by BenchMark to locate and manage the
test records. It can be reviewed and printed for a particular (filtered) valve in the Report Tools
window and is available for complete review using BenchMark database tools (see Chapter 15,
Database Tools).
TEST STANDARD: A comparison value that represents an ideal value for the parameter being
determined.
TEST TYPE: An abbreviation used to refer to a particular BenchMark test.
THROTTLING: Service where the valve is used to modulate or control the flow.
TOP CYLINDER AREA: Effective area of the cylinder side of the double acting actuator furthest
from valve body. Normally does not contain the actuator stem.
TRANSCAL TABLE: BenchMark data table TRANSCAL.
TRANSDUCER: A device that converts a physical phenomenon, in this case force or
displacement, into an electrical signal such as current, voltage or frequency.
TRIM ALPHA: Alpha character sometimes used with trim diameter designations.
TRIM DIAMETER: The diameter of the valve seat or trim.
TROUBLESHOOTING: Problem solving.
UNBALANCED AREA: In a pressure balanced plug design, the area that the inlet pressure acts on
and which must be overcome by the actuator to move the valve.
UNIT: See Unit Name.
UNIT NAME: Designation of a plant subdivision performing a specific function.
US UNITS: The units system conventionally used in the United States of America. . Typical units
include: inch, pound-mass (lbm), gallon, pound-force (lbf) and pounds per square inch (psi).
Sometimes referred to as English Units.
US UNITS SYMBOL: A US flag is the icon displayed when the BenchMark system unit’s selection
is set to US Units.
VALVE CONTROL TABLE: BenchMark data table CONTROL.
VALVE PROCESS / PIPELINE TABLE: BenchMark data table PANDP.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-14


Glossary

VALVE SERVICE TABLE: BenchMark data table SERVICE.


VALVE CONFIGURATION TABLE: BenchMark data table VCONFIG.
VALVE IDENTIFICATION TABLE: BenchMark data table VID.
VALVE MODEL: The manufacturer’s designation or class for the valve.
VALVE POSITIONER: Mechanical servo control regulating position of the valve in response to an
input signal, typically an electrical current or low level air pressure.
VALVE POSITIONING SYSTEM DATA TABLE: BenchMark data table VPOS.
VALVE TRAVEL or SHAFT ROTATION: The motion of the actuated element in a valve that
controls or modulates the fluid or gas moving through the valve. In linear valves (sometimes called
“rising stem” valves) the plugs move linearly into and out of the seat to affect this control. In
rotary valves, the shaft is actuated in a rotary movement (typically 90 deg) moving a plate or ball
within the fluid or gas flow.
VALVE TRIM DATA TABLE: BenchMark data table VTRIM.
VALVE TYPE: A description of the basic body design of the valve, i.e. globe.
VAPOR PRESSURE: The vapor pressure of a substance (solid or liquid) is the pressure exerted by
its vapor when in equilibrium with the substance.
VELOCITY: Stem velocity in displacement or rotation angle per second.
VISCOSITY: A property of fluids, either liquid or gases, which may be described as a resistance to
flow.
WORK LIST: Name given to the collection of Task Files present on Records Path. Used in the
communication between BenchMark and external applications.
WINDOWS™ PATH: The logical unit and directory structure that maps the location of a file or
group of files.
WRITTEN LICENSE AGREEMENT: Legal agreement governing the authorized use of the
BenchMark hardware and software. A copy is provided with this manual.
YEAR INSTALLED: The calendar year in which the valve was placed in service.
ZOOM: To enlarge or magnify, such as zooming in on a portion of the graph.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-15


Glossary

Reported Parameters - Baseline Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
MEASURED TOTAL TRAVEL inch, mm ,deg. Absolute difference between valve position
at minimum and maximum input signals.

SIGNAL, MIN. TRAVEL ma Input signal at zero travel from the seat.

SIGNAL, MAX. TRAVEL ma Input signal at maximum travel from seat.

SIGNAL, NOM. TRAVEL ma Input signal when displacement from the


seat is equal to the nominal (rated) valve
travel.

AVG. HDL ERROR %fs Average deviation between valve position


measured during the increasing and
decreasing signal motion at the same input
signal.

MAX. HDL ERROR %fs Largest deviation between valve position


measured during the increasing and
decreasing signal motion at the same input
signal.

LINEARITY ERROR %fs Maximum deviation of the valve position


data (increasing and decreasing travel) from
a line defined by a least squares regression
of the input signal and valve position data.

AVERAGE FRICTION lbf, N Average valve friction calculated over range.

MAXIMUM FRICTION lbf, N Maximum valve friction calculated over


range.

AVERAGE TORQUE lbf-in, N-mm Average torque (friction multiplied by


effective movement arm) calculated over the
specified range.

MAXIMUM TORQUE lbf-in, N-mm Maximum torque (friction multiplied by


effective movement arm) calculated over the
specified range.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-16


Glossary

Reported Parameters - Baseline Test (continued)


Parameter Unit(s) Description
MIN. BENCHSET psi, kPa Actuator pressure at maximum measured
travel minus the nominal valve travel.

MAX. BENCHSET psi, kPa Actuator pressure indicating maximum


actuator bench set value as measured at the
point equivalent to the maximum measured
travel.

SPRING RATE lbf/in, N/mm Change in net actuator pressure for change
in valve travel. (Spring Force / Spring Length)

SEAT LOAD, ACT + SPRG lbf/in, N/mm Total actuator and spring force applied to
the seat divided by π times the seat
diameter (line Load).

SEAT LOAD, SPRING ONLY lbf/in, N/mm Spring force only applied to the seat divided
by π times the seat diameter (no actuator
pressure).

PRESSURE, MIN. TRAVEL psig, kPa I/P output (signal pressure) at seat contact.

PRESSURE, MAX. TRAVEL psig, kPa I/P output (signal pressure) at maximum
travel.

PRESSURE, NOM. TRAVEL psig, kPa I/P output (signal pressure) when travel from
the seat is equal to the nominal travel.

AVG. POS. HDL ERROR %fs Average deviation between valve position
measured during the increasing and
decreasing signal motion at the same signal
pressure.

MAX. POS. HDL ERROR %fs Largest deviation between valve position
measured during the increasing and
decreasing signal motion at the same signal
pressure.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-17


Glossary

Reported Parameters - Baseline Test (continued)


Parameter Unit(s) Description
POS. LINEARITY ERROR %fs Maximum deviation of the increasing and
decreasing valve position from a line defined
by a least squares regression of the I/P
output signal and position data
(independent linearity error).

POS. BALANCE PRESSURE %nom Average pressure between top and bottom
cylinders in a double-acting actuator.
Expressed as a percentage of the nominal air
supply pressure.

I/P PRESSURE, MIN. SIGNAL psig, kPa I/P output pressure, min. value of nominal
range

I/P PRESSURE, MAX. SIGNAL psig, kPa Measured pressure at max. value of nominal
range.

AVG. I/P HDL ERROR %fs Average deviation between signal pressure
during increasing and decreasing valve
motion at the same input control signal.

MAX. I/P HDL ERROR %fs Largest deviation between signal pressure
during increasing and decreasing valve
motion at the same input control signal.

I/P LINEARITY ERROR %fs Maximum deviation of the I/P output


pressure (average of increasing and
decreasing travel) from a line defined by a
least squares regression of the I/P output
pressure and control signal data.

NOM. AIR SUPPLY psig, kPa Air Supply Pressure at the start of the test.

AIR SUPPLY DECREASE %nom Largest decrease in air supply pressure


measured during the duration of the test. As
a percent of nominal air pressure at test
start.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-18


Glossary

Reported Parameters - HDRL Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
MAX. HYSTERESIS ERROR %fs Maximum absolute difference in valve
position measured at the same input signal
approached from opposite directions of
motion. Value is reported as a percentage of
span and includes Deadband error.

AVG. HYSTERESIS ERROR %fs Average of the individual Hysteresis values


measured during the test. Value reported
consists of Hysteresis plus Deadband.

MAX. REPEATABILITY ERROR %fs Maximum absolute difference in valve


position measured at the same input signal
on repeating cycles and approached from
the same direction of motion. Value
reported is expressed as a percentage of
span.

AVG. REPEATABILITY ERROR %fs Average of the individual repeatability values


measured during the test.

LINEARITY ERROR ± %fs Maximum deviation of valve position from


an ideal performance line defined by a least
squares regression of the position data
points.

MEASURED SPAN inch, mm, deg Absolute position difference measured at


the endpoints of the nominal input signal
range of the valve.

HOLDTIME sec The time in seconds that the control valve is


allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded.
This pause ensures that the valve is finished
moving. Set either automatically or
manually.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-19


Glossary

Reported Parameters - Deadband Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
DEADBAND ERROR %fs The range through which the input signal
may be varied (after being reversed) without
initiating observable change in valve travel.
Expressed as the percentage of nominal
input signal span.

SPAN OFFSET: %fs Position in span corresponding to the input


signal, i.e. a valve sent a 50% input signal
should move to a 50% offset (mid-span).

MEASURED SPAN inch, mm, deg Absolute position difference measured at


the endpoints of the nominal input signal
range of the valve.

HOLDTIME sec The time in seconds that the control valve is


allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded.
This pause ensures that the valve is finished
moving. Set either automatically or
manually.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-20


Glossary

Reported Parameters – Step Utility Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
ACTUAL STEP inch, mm, deg Total position change resulting from a step
input signal change.
IDEAL STEP inch, mm, deg. Ideal position change expected as a result of
a step input signal change (assumes valve
travel is linear with respect to input signal).
STEADY STATE ERROR inch, mm, deg Difference between ideal step and actual
step. Also expressed in percent error of step.
STEADY STATE [ ] Answered Yes or No. Yes: indicates that the
rate of change in valve position at test end
(slope of last 50 data points) was less than
0.01% of span per second.
MID-STROKE VELOCITY inch, mm / sec The velocity of the valve stem measured at a
position equal to typ. 50% of the final
steady state travel. In rotary tests expressed
as deg/sec.
DEAD TIME sec The interval of time between the initiation
of input signal change to threshold of final
steady-state travel.
RESPONSE TIME sec The time interval between the initiation of
input signal change to typ. 63.2% final
steady-state travel.
RISE TIME sec The interval of time required for the travel to
change from typ.10% to 90% of the final
steady-state travel.
SETTLING TIME sec The interval of time from the initiation of
input signal change to the final steady-state
travel remains within a typ. ±2% band width
centered on steady-state travel.
MAX. OVERSHOOT inch, mm, deg The maximum travel beyond the final
steady-state travel as a result of the signal
step change.
TIME, MAX. OVERSHOOT sec Time in the test that the maximum
overshoot occurs

Reported Parameters – Step Utility Test (continued)

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-21


Glossary

Parameter Unit(s) Description


STEP SIZE %fs Size of the input signal change in percentage
of input signal span. For example: a 4-20
ma valve has a 16 ma span. A 10% step
size would be a signal change of 1.6 (ma).
SPAN OFFSET: %fs Position in span corresponding to the input
signal, i.e. a valve, with a linear
characteristic, sent a 50% input signal
should move to a 50% offset (mid-span).

DURATION sec Period of time over which data was


collected for the test.

SIGNAL DIRECTION [ ] INCReasing or DECReasing input signal


change.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-22


Glossary

Reported Parameters – Step Response Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
MEASURED SPAN inch, mm, deg Absolute position difference measured at
the endpoints of the nominal input signal
range of valve.

HOLDTIME sec The time in seconds that the control valve is


allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded.
This pause ensures that the valve is finished
moving. Set either automatically or
manually.

STEP [SIZE] %fs Size of the input signal change in percentage


of input signal span. For example: a 4-20
ma valve has a 16 ma span. A 10% step
size would be a signal change of 1.6 (ma). In
this test all step changes are centered about
50% of the input signal range.

SIGNAL [DIRECTION] [ ] Direction of input signal change.

DEAD [TIME] sec For increasing or decreasing steps, the time


between the initiation of input signal change
to threshold percentage of the final steady-
state travel.

RESP [ONSE TIME] sec For increasing or decreasing steps, the time
between the initiation of input signal change
to typ. 63.2% of the final steady-state travel.

RISE [TIME] sec For increasing or decreasing steps, the time


required for the travel to change from typ.
10% to 90% of the final steady-state travel.

TOTAL [TIME] sec Time between the initiation of input signal


change to typ. 98% of the final steady-state
travel.

SETTLE [ING TIME] sec Time between input signal change to final
steady-state travel remains within a typ.
±2% band width centered on the steady-
state value.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-23


Glossary

Reported Parameters – Step Response Test (continued)


Parameter Unit(s) Description
ACTUAL [STEP] inch, mm, deg. Total position change (travel) resulting from
a step input signal change.

IDEAL [STEP] inch, mm, deg. Ideal position change expected as a result of
a step input signal change (assumes valve
travel is linear with respect to input signal).

SS [STEADY STATE] ERROR inch, mm, deg Difference between the ideal step and
actual step.

SS [STEADY STATE] ERROR %step Ratio of the difference between the ideal
step and the actual step over the ideal step
expressed as a percent error of the ideal
step.

OVERSHOOT inch, mm, deg Absolute maximum displacement beyond


the steady-state position resulting from
signal change.

[MID-STEP] VELOCITY inch, mm/ sec The velocity of the valve stem measured at a
position equal to typ. 50% of the final
steady state travel. In rotary tests this term is
expressed as deg/sec.

SS [STEADY STATE] SLOPE %step / sec Rate of change in valve position at test end.

STEADY [STATE] [ ] Answered Yes or No. Yes: indicates that the


rate of change in valve position at test end
(slope of last 50 data points) was less than
0.01% of span per second.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-24


Glossary

Reported Parameters – Sensitivity Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
MEASURED SPAN inch, mm, deg Absolute position difference measured at
the endpoints of the nominal input signal
range of the valve.

HOLDTIME sec The time in seconds that the control valve is


allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded.
This pause ensures that the valve is finished
moving. Set either automatically or
manually.

STEP SIZE %fs Size of the input signal change in percentage


of input signal span. For example: a 4-20
ma valve has a 16 ma span. A 10% step
size would be a signal change of 1.6 (ma).

SPAN OFFSET: %fs Position in span corresponding to the input


signal, i.e. a valve sent a 50% input signal
should move to a 50% offset (mid-span).

SIGNAL DIRECTION [ ] INCReasing or DECReasing signal change.

ACTUAL STEP inch, mm, deg. Total position change (travel) resulting from
a step input signal change.

IDEAL STEP inch, mm, deg. Ideal position change expected as a result of
a step input signal change (assumes valve
travel is linear with respect to input signal).

STEP ERROR inch, mm, deg. Difference between the ideal step change
and the actual steady state step change
expressed in units of displacement.

STEP ERROR %step Difference between the ideal step and the
actual steady state step expressed as a
percentage of the ideal step.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-25


Glossary

Reported Parameters – Resolution Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
MEASURED SPAN inch, mm, deg Absolute position difference measured at
the endpoints of the nominal input signal
range of the valve.

HOLDTIME sec The time in seconds that the control valve is


allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded.
This pause ensures that the valve is finished
moving. Set either automatically or
manually.

STEP SIZE %fs Size of the input signal change in percentage


of input signal span. For example: a 4-20
ma valve has a 16 ma span. A 10% step
size would be a signal change of 1.6 (ma).

SPAN OFFSET: %fs Position in span corresponding to the input


signal, i.e. a valve sent a 50% input signal
should move to a 50% offset (mid-span).

SIGNAL DIRECTION [ ] INCReasing or DECReasing signal change.

ACTUAL STEP inch, mm, deg. Total position change (travel) resulting from
a step input signal change.

IDEAL STEP inch, mm, deg. Ideal position change expected as a result of
a step input signal change (assumes valve
travel is linear with respect to input signal).

STEP ERROR inch, mm, deg. Difference between the ideal step change
and the actual steady state step change
expressed in units of displacement.

STEP ERROR %step Difference between the ideal step and the
actual steady state step expressed as a
percentage of the ideal step.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-26


Glossary

Reported Parameters – Frequency Response Test


Parameter Unit(s) Description
MEASURED SPAN inch, mm, deg Absolute position difference measured at
endpoints of nominal input signal range of
the valve.
HOLDTIME sec The time in seconds that the control valve is
allowed to stabilize before the next
procedural step or before data is recorded.
This pause ensures that the valve is finished
moving. Set either automatically or
manually.
OFFSET: %fs Position in span corresponding to the input
signal, i.e. a valve sent a 50% input signal
should move to a 50% offset (mid-span).
NOMINAL STEP %fs Peak-to-Peak value of the input signal sine
wave as a percentage on input signal span.
BANDWIDTH Hz Frequency corresponding to a gain of -6 dB.
The symbol “I” indicates that the value was
interpolated between data points and the
symbol “?” indicates that only one data
point or less exists and it is not possible to
establish a bandwidth.
FREQUENCY Hz Rate at which the input signal sine wave
changes. Inverse of the period, the time to
complete one sine wave, is the frequency of
the signal.
GAIN dB Logarithmic (20 log10) ratio of the final peak
to peak magnitude of valve travel to the
peak to peak magnitude of the valve
response to the reference (lowest frequency)
test sinusoidal input signal.
PHASE LAG deg Amount travel lags or trails the sinusoidal
input signal, in degrees, as portion of a full
cycle (360 degrees).
VALID DATA [ ] Yes: indicates that valve response was
sinusoidal and a valid data analysis could be
performed.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page 18-27


A
Viewing Graphs

Page
Enlarge Graph to Full Screen A-1
Zoom (Enlarge) Part of a Graph A-2
Identify Data Values and Coordinates A-3
Customize Graphs A-4
Export Graphs A-5
Appendix A
Viewing Graphs

Enlarge Graph to Full Screen

Figure A.1
Enlarge a
Graph to Full
Screen

Steps to Proceed:
1. All graphs with the exception of the HDRL and Deadband graphs can be enlarged to full
screen. This is very useful for viewing four graph displays such as the one shown in Figure
A.1.
2. Place the cursor on the graph. Press the right mouse button to launch a pop-up menu. Select
MAXIMIZE [M] and release. The graph will enlarge to occupy the full window area. (Figure
A.2 later in this appendix)
3. Click the mouse cursor over the window title bar or press ESC to return to the original graph
size and location.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page A-1


Appendix A
Viewing Graphs

Zoom (Enlarge) Part of a Graph

Figure A.2
Zoom
(Enlarge) Part
of a Graph

Steps to Proceed:
1. While depressing the Shift key and the left mouse button, trace an area on the graph with
the mouse. The mouse cursor will change to a magnifying graph icon.
2. Release the Shift key and left mouse button; the boxed area of the graph will be enlarged to
full screen. Depress the “Ctrl” key and the “Z” key to return to the original scale.
3. This function applies to Baseline, HDRL, Sensitivity, Resolution, Step Response, Step Utility,
and Frequency Response graphs.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page A-2


Appendix A
Viewing Graphs

Identify Data Values and Coordinates

Inset “A.3-A”

Figure A.3
Identify Data
Values and
Coordinates

Steps to Proceed:
1. Place the cursor on the curve. When a data point is located the mouse cursor will change to
the pointing finger shown. This indicates that the value returned will be a data value. If the
cursor does not change, the value return will be the coordinate of that location on the graph.
2. Double-click the left mouse button. The x-axis and y-axis coordinate will display on the
window as shown in Figure A.3-A inset.
3. Click the left mouse button elsewhere on the graph to restore the window.
4. This graph tool can differentiate between the primary and secondary Y axes. Therefore, as in
this example, when the cursor is placed on the friction data, which is plotted versus the
secondary Y axis (to the right), the correct data point is returned. Had the cursor been placed
on the displacement data, the data returned would be referenced to the primary Y axis on
the left. This is a very useful tool to quickly and accurately measure values of interest.
5. This function does not apply to HDRL graphs.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page A-3


Appendix A
Viewing Graphs

Customize Graphs

Figure A.4
Customize
Graphs
Dialog

Steps to Proceed:
1. Place the cursor anywhere on the colored border region surrounding the graph and Double-
click the left mouse button. Alternatively, press the right mouse button and a pop-up
menu will be displayed, select CUSTOMIZATION DIALOG [C].
2. A dialog box is displayed that allows the operator to customize the appearance of the graph;
style, text size, decimal places, grid lines, fonts and colors can be set using this interface. The
data graphed can be modified by highlighting the appropriate subsets to plot.
3. Modifications made using this interface do not alter the underlying BenchMark data.
4. The Export Dialog can be accessed from this dialog by pressing EXPORT [E].

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page A-4


Appendix A
Viewing Graphs

Export Graphs

Figure A.5
Export
Graphs
Dialog

Steps to Proceed:
1. The Export Dialog box allows the operator several options in exporting or printing the graph
displayed. These options are in addition to the options offered by the other BenchMark
functions.
2. Click on CANCEL to return to close the Export Graph dialog box.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page A-5


B
Summary of Data Tables

Page
Summary of Data Tables B-1
`
Appendix B
Summary of Data Tables

Table Name: ACTUATOR


Description: Catalog Table, Actuator Data
Folder: CATALOG

Name Type Size Description


MFGR TEXT 15 Manufacturer
STYLE TEXT 13 Single or NUMERIC Acting
MODEL TEXT 10 Model Desigation
DAREA TEXT 6 Diaphragm Effective Area
TOPAREA NUMERIC 8 Top Area
BOTAREA NUMERIC 8 Bottom Area
DAREA_M TEXT 6 Metric, Diaphragm Effective Area
TOPAREA_M NUMERIC 8 Metric, Top Area
BOTAREA_M NUMERIC 8 Metric, Bottom Area
SOURCE TEXT 10 Source for Data

Table Name: ADSYS


Description: A/D System Configuration
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


CHANNEL TEXT 1 A/D Channel
TRANSDUCER TEXT 25 Parameter Measured
COLORCODE TEXT 17 Color Code
INTERFACE TEXT 10 Interface Connect Label
RANGE NUMERIC 8 Transducer Range
RANGEUNIT TEXT 4 Transducer Range Units
BDSERIAL TEXT 8 BDE Assigned Serial Number
SCALEFACT NUMERIC 14 Transducer Scalefactor
CALDATE DATE 8 Date Last Calibrated
INTERVAL NUMERIC 2 Recommended Interval Between Calibration, Months
REMOTE BOOLEAN 1 Remote Table Flag

Table Name: BASETIM4


Description: A/D Default Parameter Table
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TESTTIME NUMERIC 8 Test Duration
TVALUE NUMERIC 8 D/A Setup Parameter
TCTS NUMERIC 8 D/A Setup Parameter
REPS NUMERIC 8 D/A Setup Parameter
TOTCTS NUMERIC 8 D/A Setup Parameter

Table Name: BLDATA


Description: Baseline Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tagnumber
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 1


ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
TDATE TEXT 10 Test Date
TTIME TEXT 5 Test Time
TRAVEL NUMERIC 8 Valve Travel (rotation)
SIGMINT NUMERIC 8 Signal, Minimum Travel
SIGMAXT NUMERIC 8 Signal, Maximum Travel
SIGNOMT NUMERIC 8 Signal, Nominal Travel
MAXHDL NUMERIC 8 Overall HD + Lag, Maximum
AVGHDL NUMERIC 8 Overall HD + Lag, Average
LINEAR NUMERIC 8 Overall Linearity
MAXFRICT NUMERIC 8 Friction, Maximum
AVGFRICT NUMERIC 8 Friction, Average
AVGTORQ NUMERIC 8 Torque, Average
BSMIN NUMERIC 8 Benchset, Minimum
BSMAX NUMERIC 8 Benchset, Maximum
SRATE NUMERIC 8 Springrate
SLAS NUMERIC 8 Seatload, Actuator + Spring
SLSO NUMERIC 8 Seatload, Spring Only
PPMIN NUMERIC 8 Pos. Inlet Press., Min. Travel
PPMAX NUMERIC 8 Pos. Inlet Press., Max. Travel
PPNOM NUMERIC 8 Pos. Inlet Press.. Nom. Travel
MAXPHDL NUMERIC 8 Pos. HD+Lag, Maximum
AVGPHDL NUMERIC 8 Pos. HD+Lag, Average
POSLIN NUMERIC 8 Pos. Linearity
PBALPRES NUMERIC 8 Pos. Balance Pressure
IPMIN NUMERIC 8 I/P Transducer, Min. Nominal
IPMAX NUMERIC 8 I/P Transducer, Max. Nominal
MAXIPHDL NUMERIC 8 I/P HD+Lag, Maximum
AVGIPHDL NUMERIC 8 I/P HD+Lag, Average
IPLIN NUMERIC 8 I/P Linearity
ASNOM NUMERIC 8 Air Supply, Nominal Press.
ASDROP NUMERIC 8 Air Supply, Droop
RAMPTIME NUMERIC 8 Ramp Time
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Path
COMMENT MEMO 0 Post Test Comments
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CFGEXP


Description: Configuration Table for Default Standards Calcs
Folder: STDRULES

Name Type Size Description


VCONFIG TEXT 11 Linear or Rotary
VMFGR TEXT 16 Valve Manufacturer
VTYPE TEXT 11 Valve Type
VMODEL TEXT 11 Valve Model
PKGTYPE TEXT 10 Packing Type
STEMDIA TEXT 5 Stem Diameter
PBCFG TEXT 6 Pressure Balance Configuration
ACTSTYLE TEXT 14 Actuator Style
ACTMFGR TEXT 16 Actuator Manufacturer
ACTMODEL TEXT 11 Actuator Model
POSITIONER TEXT 11 Positioner
CAMPROFILE TEXT 11 Positioner Cam Profile
STDSPEC TEXT 4 Standard Specification
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CONTROL

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 2


Description: Control Expectations For Valve
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
THROTTLE BOOLEAN 1 Control or On/Off Service
DESACCY NUMERIC 8 Desired Accuracy
LOOPTYPE TEXT 8 Type of Loop
LOOPIMPORT TEXT 8 Loop Importance
LOOPTC NUMERIC 8 Loop Time Constant
PVAR TEXT 10 Process Variable
PVHIGH NUMERIC 8 Process Variable High Limit
PVLOW NUMERIC 8 Process Variable Low Limit
PVUNITS TEXT 10 Process Variable Units
CTRLNOTE MEMO 0 Control App Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CPBASE0


Description: Baseline Comparative Standards - Status Table
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
TRAVEL BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
SIGSEAT BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
SIGNOM BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
SIGMAX BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
PPSEAT BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
PPNOM BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
PPMAX BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
IPMIN BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
IPMAX BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
FRICT BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
TORQ BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
BSMIN BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
BSMAX BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
SR BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
SLAS BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
SLSO BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
HDLAG BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
LINEAR BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
POSHDL BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
POSLIN BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
IPHDL BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
ASDRP BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status
PBALPRES BOOLEAN 1 Performance Standard Enabled Status

Table Name: CPBASE1


Description: Baseline Comparative Standards - Table One
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 3


ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
MAXTRAVEL NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Acceptable Travel
MINTRAVEL NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Acceptable Travel
SIGMAXTMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Signal at Max. Travel
SIGMAXTMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Signal at Max. Travel
SIGMINTMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Signal at Min. Travel
SIGMINTMIN NUMERIC 8 Std. Min. Signal at Min. Travel
SIGNOMMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Signal at Nom. Travel
SIGNOMMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Signal at Nom. Travel
HDLAG NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. HD+Lag Error
LINEAR NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Linearity Error
FRICTOL NUMERIC 8 Std, Friction Tolerance, +/-
TORQTOL NUMERIC 8 Std, Torque Tolerance, +/-
ASDRP NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Air Supply Droop
BSMINMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Benchset Minimum
BSMINMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Benchset Minimum
BSMAXMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Benchset Maximum
BSMAXMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Benchset Maximum
SRMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Springrate
SRMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Springrate
SLAS NUMERIC 8 Std, Seatload, Act + Sprg, Min.
SLSO NUMERIC 8 Std, Seatload, Sprg Only, Min.
SLOAS NUMERIC 8 Std, Seatload, Act + Sprg, Online, Min.
STATUS TEXT 7 Edit Status of Record
SLOSO NUMERIC 8 Std, Seatload, Sprg Only, Online, Min.
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CPBASE2


Description: Baseline Comparative Standards - Table Two
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
PPMAXMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Pos. Inlet Press, Max. Travel
PPMAXMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Pos. Inlet Press, Max. Travel
PPMINMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Pos. Inlet Press, Min. Travel
PPMINMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Pos. Inlet Press, Min. Travel
PPNOMMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Pos. Inlet Press, Nom. Travel
PPNOMMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Pos. Inlet Press, Nom. Travel
POSHDL NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Pos. HD+Lag Error
POSLIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Pos. Linearity
PBALPRES NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Pos. Balance Pressure
IPMAXMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Press, I/P Max. Nominal
IPMAXMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Press, I/P Max. Nominal
IPMINMAX NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Press, I/P Min. Nominal
IPMINMIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Min. Press, I/P Min. Nominal
IPHDL NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. I/P HD+Lag Error
IPLIN NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. I/P Linearity Error
STATUS TEXT 7 Edit Status of Record
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CPHDRL


Description: HDRL Comparative Standards
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 4


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
HMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Hysteresis Error
RMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Repeatability Error
LMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Linearity Error
DBMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. Deadband Error
STATUS TEXT 7 Edit Status of HDRL Record
DBSTATUS TEXT 7 Edit Status of Deadband Record
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CPRES


Description: Resolution Comparative Standards
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
SERR5I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR5D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
SERR2I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 2%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR2D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 2%, Decr. Signal Position Error
SERR1I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 1%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR1D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 1%, Decr. Signal Position Error
SERR05I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 0.5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR05D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 0.5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
STATUS TEXT 7 Edit Status of Record
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CPSENS


Description: Sensititvity Comparative Standards
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
SERR5I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR5D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
SERR2I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 2%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR2D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 2%, Decr. Signal Position Error
SERR1I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 1%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR1D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 1%, Decr. Signal Position Error
SERR05I NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 0.5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
SERR05D NUMERIC 8 Std, Max. 0.5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
STATUS TEXT 7 Edit Status of Record
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CPSTEP


Description: Step Response Comparative Standards
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturer Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 5


DT100 NUMERIC 8 Std, 100% Step, Dead Time
RSP100 NUMERIC 8 Std, 100% Step, Response Time
RT100 NUMERIC 8 Std, 100% Step, Rise Time
TT100 NUMERIC 8 Std, 100% Step, Total Time
ST100 NUMERIC 8 Std, 100% Step, Settling Time
OUS100 NUMERIC 8 Std, 100% Step, Max. Overshoot
DT80 NUMERIC 8 Std, 80% Step, Dead Time
RSP80 NUMERIC 8 Std, 80% Step, Response Time
RT80 NUMERIC 8 Std, 80% Step, Rise Time
TT80 NUMERIC 8 Std, 80% Step, Total Time
ST80 NUMERIC 8 Std, 80% Step, Settling Time
OUS80 NUMERIC 8 Std, 80% Step, Max. Overshoot
DT10 NUMERIC 8 Std, 10% Step, Dead Time
RSP10 NUMERIC 8 Std, 10% Step, Response Time
RT10 NUMERIC 8 Std, 10% Step, Rise Time
TT10 NUMERIC 8 Std, 10% Step, Total Time
ST10 NUMERIC 8 Std, 10% Step, Settling Time
OUS10 NUMERIC 8 Std, 10% Step, Max. Overshoot
DT2 NUMERIC 8 Std, 2% Step, Dead Time
RSP2 NUMERIC 8 Std, 2% Step, Response Time
RT2 NUMERIC 8 Std, 2% Step, Rise Time
TT2 NUMERIC 8 Std, 2% Step, Total Time
ST2 NUMERIC 8 Std, 2% Step, Settling Time
OUS2 NUMERIC 8 Std, 2% Step, Max. Overshoot
FR5 NUMERIC 8 Std, 10% p-p Bandwidth, Minimum
FR2 NUMERIC 8 Std, 2% p-p Bandwidth, Minimum
STATUS TEXT 7 Edit Status of Record
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CUSTEXP


Description: Customer Table for Default Standards Calcs
Folder: STDRULES

Name Type Size Description


COMPANY TEXT 25 Company Name
PLANT TEXT 25 Plant Name
UNIT TEXT 25 Unit Name
LSPEC TEXT 4 Linear Specification
RSPEC TEXT 4 Rotary Specification
M BOOLEAN 1 Units Flag

Table Name: CUSTLIST


Description: Customer Data Table
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


CUSTID TEXT 10 Customer ID Designation
COMPANY TEXT 25 Company Name
PLANT TEXT 25 Plant Name
UNIT TEXT 25 Unit Name
LOCATION TEXT 25 Location
RECPATH TEXT 254 Record Path
DATPATH TEXT 254 Graph File Path
MENUFILE TEXT 254 Menu File
CATPATH TEXT 254 Catalog Path
STDSPATH TEXT 254 Standard Rules Path

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 6


Table Name: CV
Description: Catalog Table, Valve Configuration Catalog
Folder: CATALOG

Name Type Size Description


MFGR TEXT 15 Valve Manufacturer
CONFIG TEXT 10 Valve Configuration
TYPE TEXT 10 Valve Type
MODEL TEXT 10 Valve Model
PCLASS TEXT 4 Pressure Class
SIZE TEXT 6 Valve Size
FLOW TEXT 10 Flow Direction
CHAR TEXT 10 Flow Characteristic
PBCFG TEXT 5 Pressure Balance Configuration
SEATDIA TEXT 5 Seat Diameter
A TEXT 1 Seat Alpha
STROKE TEXT 6 Nominal Stroke
FL TEXT 5 Coefficient
CV TEXT 8 Coefficient
SIZE_M TEXT 6 Metric, Valve Size
SEATDIA_M TEXT 5 Metric, Seat Diameter
STROKE_M TEXT 6 Metric, Nominal Stroke
SOURCE TEXT 10 Source for Data

Table Name: DBDATA


Description: Dead Band Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
HOLDTIME NUMERIC 8 System Hold Duration
STROKE NUMERIC 8 Measured Valve Stroke
OFFSET NUMERIC 8 Position in Span
DB NUMERIC 8 Deadband Error
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Path
COMMENT MEMO 0 Post Test Comments
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: DFCALC


Description: Calculation Parameters for Default Standards Calcs
Folder: STDRULES

Name Type Size Description


SPECNUM TEXT 6 Specification Number
STEPTABLE TEXT 8 Step Table Name
TRANGE1 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TRANGE2 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TRAVMAX1 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TRAVMIN1 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TRAVMAX2 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TRAVMIN2 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TRAVMAX3 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TRAVMIN3 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
SIGP NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
Q BOOLEAN 1 Default Calculation Parameter

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 7


HDLAG NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
OVRLIN NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
FTOL NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
ASDRP NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
BSTOL NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
SRTOL NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
SLVSIZE NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL1SLA NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL1SLB NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL2SLA NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL2SLB NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL3SLA NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL3SLB NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL4SLA NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL4SLB NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL5SLA NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL5SLB NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL6SLA NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
CL6SLB NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
POSSIG NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
PHDLAG NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
POSLIN NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
BALPRES NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
IPMAXTOL NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
IPMINTOL NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
IPHDL NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
IPLIN NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
RESFACT5 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
RESFACT2 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
RESFACT1 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
RESFACT05 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
SENFACT5 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
SENFACT2 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
SENFACT1 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
SENFACT05 NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
TORQTOL NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
HMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
RMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
LMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
DBMAXERR NUMERIC 8 Default Calculation Parameter
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: DFNOTES


Description: Standards Rules, Specification Registry
Folder: STDRULES

Name Type Size Description


SPECNUM TEXT 4 Specification Number
DESCRIPT TEXT 60 Description
SPECDATE DATE 8 Specification Date
REVDATE DATE 8 Revision Date
SPECMEMO MEMO 0 Specification Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: FIELDMNU


Description: Default Menu File for Field Applications - Example
Folder: MENUS

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 8


Name Type Size Description
VMFGR TEXT 15 Valve Manufacturers
VTYPE TEXT 10 Valve Tyoes
VMODEL TEXT 10 Valve Models
PCLASS NUMERIC 8 Pressure Classes
PKGTYPE TEXT 10 Packing Types
PKGMATL TEXT 10 Packing Materials
FLOWDIR TEXT 10 Flow Directions
FLOWCHAR TEXT 10 Flow Characteristics
PBALCFG TEXT 5 Pressure Balance Configurations
PBSEAL TEXT 10 Pressure Balance Seal Materials
ACTMFGR TEXT 15 Actuator Manufacturers
ACTMODEL TEXT 10 Acuator Models
SIGSOURCE TEXT 10 Signal Sources
POSITIONER TEXT 10 Positioners
BOOSTERS TEXT 10 Boosters
RISKCLASS TEXT 10 Risk Classes

Table Name: FRDATA


Description: Frequency Response Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternate Serial Number
HOLDTIME NUMERIC 8 System HoldTime
STROKE NUMERIC 8 Measure Valve Stroke
OFFSET NUMERIC 8 Span Location
NOMPP NUMERIC 8 Nominal Peak to Peak Amplitude
BW NUMERIC 8 Band Width
BWSYM TEXT 1 Band Width Synbol
A01FDB NUMERIC 8 0.1 Hz Attenuation, db
A02FDB NUMERIC 8 0.2 Hz Attenuation, db
A04FDB NUMERIC 8 0.4 Hz Attenuation, db
A08FDB NUMERIC 8 0.8 Hz Attenuation, db
A10FDB NUMERIC 8 1.0 Hz Attenuation, db
A20FDB NUMERIC 8 2.0 Hz Attenuation, db
P01FD NUMERIC 8 0.1 Hz Phase Lag, degs
P02FD NUMERIC 8 0.2 Hz Phase Lag, degs
P04FD NUMERIC 8 0.4 Hz Phase Lag, degs
P08FD NUMERIC 8 0.8 Hz Phase Lag, degs
P10FD NUMERIC 8 1.0 Hz Phase Lag, degs
P20FD NUMERIC 8 2.0 Hz Phase Lag, degs
VAL01 BOOLEAN 1 Valid Data
VAL02 BOOLEAN 1 Valid Data
VAL04 BOOLEAN 1 Valid Data
VAL08 BOOLEAN 1 Valid Data
VAL10 BOOLEAN 1 Valid Data
VAL20 BOOLEAN 1 Valid Data
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Directory
COMMENT MEMO 0 Post Test Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: FRICTION


Description: Catalog Table, Packing and Friction Data
Folder: CATALOG

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 9


Name Type Size Description
MFGR TEXT 15 Manufacturer
CONFIG TEXT 10 Configuration
PKGTYPE TEXT 10 Paking Type
PKGMATL TEXT 10 Packing Material
STEMDIA NUMERIC 8 Stem Diameter
FRICTION NUMERIC 8 Typical Friction
TORQUE NUMERIC 8 Typical Torque
STEMDIA_M NUMERIC 8 Metric, Stem Diameter
FRICTION_M NUMERIC 8 Metric, Typical Friction
TORQUE_M NUMERIC 8 Metric, Typical Torque
SOURCE TEXT 15 Source of Data

Table Name: HDRLDATA


Description: HDRL Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
TESTDATE TEXT 10 Test Date
HYSTMAX NUMERIC 8 Hysteresis Maximum
HYSTAVG NUMERIC 8 Hysteresis Minimum
REPEATMAX NUMERIC 8 Repeatability, Maximum
REPEATAVG NUMERIC 8 Repeatability, Minimum
LINEARITY NUMERIC 8 Linearity
COMMENT MEMO 0 Post Test Notes
STROKE NUMERIC 8 Measured Valve Travel
HOLDTIME NUMERIC 8 System Holdtime
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Directory
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: LANGTAB


Description: Language Reference
Folder: LANG_DLL

Name Type Size Description


LCID NUMERIC 9 System Language Code
LANGUAGE TEXT 28 System Language, English Characters
LOCALE TEXT 28 System Locale, English Characters

Table Name: MATERIAL


Description: Valve Materials
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
MATLNOTE MEMO 0 Valve Material Note
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag
BODY TEXT 15 Body Material
BONNET TEXT 15 Bonnet Material
PLUG TEXT 15 Plug Material
SEAT TEXT 15 Seat Material

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 10


CAGE TEXT 15 Cage Material
STEM TEXT 15 Stem Material
GASKET TEXT 15 Gasket Material
MATLCERT TEXT 30 Material Certifications

Table Name: OWNER


Description: BenchMark Owner Information
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


OWNER TEXT 35 Licensed Owner
SYSDESG TEXT 2 System Designation
SERIALNUM TEXT 15 System Serial Number
LOCATION TEXT 25 Location
PHONE TEXT 20 Phone Number
FAX TEXT 20 Fax Number
CALDATE DATE 8 System Calibration Date
COMPANY TEXT 50 Company Name, Report Cover Sheet
ADDRESS TEXT 50 Address, Report Cover Sheet
CITY TEXT 50 City, Report Cover Sheet
STATE TEXT 25 State, Report Cover Sheet
COUNTRY TEXT 50 Country, Report Cover Sheet
ZIPCODE TEXT 12 Zipcode, Report Cover Sheet
WEBSITE TEXT 50 Website URL, Report Cover Sheet
OPERATOR TEXT 50 BenchMark Operator, Test Log
INSTALLED DATE 8 Installation Date of BenchMark Software

Table Name: PANDP


Description: Valve Process and Pipeline Information
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
MEDIA TEXT 10 Process Media
CRITPRESS NUMERIC 8 Process, Critical Pressure
CRITTEMP NUMERIC 8 Process, Critical Temperature
MOLWT NUMERIC 8 Process, Molecular Weight
SEATLEAK TEXT 9 Seat Leak Requirement
HAZARD TEXT 15 Hazardous Area Rating
PINSIZE NUMERIC 8 Pipe, Inlet Size
POUTSIZE NUMERIC 8 Pipe, Outlet Size
PINSCH NUMERIC 8 Pipe, Inlet Schedule
POUTSCH NUMERIC 8 Pipe, Outlet Schedule
INCONN TEXT 8 Pipe, Inlet Connection
OUTCONN TEXT 8 Pipe, Outlet Connection
INFACE TEXT 8 Pipe, Inlet Facing Specification
OUTFACE TEXT 8 Pipe, Outlet Facing Specification
ININSUL TEXT 8 Pipe, Inlet Side, Insulation
OUTINSUL TEXT 8 Pipe, Outlet Side, Insulation
OUTTHK NUMERIC 8 Pipe, Inlet Side, Insulation Thickness
INTHK NUMERIC 8 Pipe, Outlet Side, Insulation Thickness
ORIENT TEXT 5 Valve Orientation
MAXPRESS NUMERIC 8 Valve Maximum Pressure
MAXTEMP NUMERIC 8 Valve Maximum Temperature
PROCNOTE MEMO 0 Process Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag
PUNIT TEXT 6 Pressure Units

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 11


INSULUNIT TEXT 6 Insulation Thickness Units
PRESSUNIT TEXT 6 Pressure Units
TEMPUNIT TEXT 6 Temperature Units
CRITPUNIT TEXT 6 Critical Pressure Units
CRITTUNIT TEXT 10 Critical Temperature Units
HYDRO NUMERIC 8 Hydrostatic Test Pressure
HYDROUNIT TEXT 6 Hydrostatic Test Pressure Units

Table Name: PFCOM


Description: Pass / Fail Comments, Colors and Thresholds
Folder: STDRULES

Name Type Size Description


PARAMETER TEXT 12 Applicable Test Parameter
LOW NUMERIC 8 Low Error Value, Percent, Inclusive
HIGH NUMERIC 8 High Error Value, Percent, Inclusive
COMMENT TEXT 30 Comment For Error Value
COLOR TEXT 10 Highlight Color

Table Name: PHOTOS


Description: Image Registry
Folder: RECORDS\PHOTOS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
DESCR TEXT 50 Description of Image
LINK TEXT 254 Link to Image
NOTES MEMO 10 Notes Regarding Image

Table Name: RESDATA


Description: Resolution Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
HOLDTIME NUMERIC 8 System Holdtime
OFFSET NUMERIC 8 Location in Span
CAMPROFILE TEXT 10 Positioner Cam Profile
PERR5I NUMERIC 8 5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
STROKE NUMERIC 8 Meaured Valve Stroke
PERR5D NUMERIC 8 5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
PERR2I NUMERIC 8 2%, Incr. Signal Position Error
PERR2D NUMERIC 8 2%, Decr. Signal Position Error
PERR1I NUMERIC 8 1%, Incr. Signal Position Error
PERR1D NUMERIC 8 1%, Decr. Signal Position Error
PERR05I NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
PERR05D NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
IDEAL5I NUMERIC 8 5%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL5D NUMERIC 8 5%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL2I NUMERIC 8 2%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL2D NUMERIC 8 2%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL1I NUMERIC 8 1%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL1D NUMERIC 8 1%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 12


IDEAL05D NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL05I NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Directory
COMMENT MEMO 0 Post Test Comments
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: SENSDATA


Description: Sensitivity Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
HOLDTIME NUMERIC 8 System Holdtime
OFFSET NUMERIC 8 Location in Span
CAMPROFILE TEXT 10 Positioner Cam Profile
PERR5I NUMERIC 8 5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
STROKE NUMERIC 8 Meaured Valve Stroke
PERR5D NUMERIC 8 5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
PERR2I NUMERIC 8 2%, Incr. Signal Position Error
PERR2D NUMERIC 8 2%, Decr. Signal Position Error
PERR1I NUMERIC 8 1%, Incr. Signal Position Error
PERR1D NUMERIC 8 1%, Decr. Signal Position Error
PERR05I NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Incr. Signal Position Error
PERR05D NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Decr. Signal Position Error
IDEAL5I NUMERIC 8 5%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL5D NUMERIC 8 5%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL2I NUMERIC 8 2%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL2D NUMERIC 8 2%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL1I NUMERIC 8 1%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL1D NUMERIC 8 1%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL05D NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Incr. Signal, Ideal Step
IDEAL05I NUMERIC 8 0.5%, Decr. Signal, Ideal Step
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Directory
COMMENT MEMO 0 Post Test Comments
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: SERVICE


Description: Valve Service and Application Information
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
QMAX NUMERIC 8 Process, Flow Maximum
QNOM NUMERIC 8 Process, Flow Nominal
QMIN NUMERIC 8 Process, Flow Minimum
P1MAX NUMERIC 8 Process, Upstream Pressure, Maximum
P1NOM NUMERIC 8 Process, Upstream Pressure, Nominal
P1MIN NUMERIC 8 Process, Upstream Pressure, Minimum
P2MAX NUMERIC 8 Process, Downstream Pressure, Maximum
P2NOM NUMERIC 8 Process, Downstream Pressure, Nominal
P2MIN NUMERIC 8 Process, Downstream Pressure, Minimum
TMAX NUMERIC 8 Process Temperature, Maximum
TNOM NUMERIC 8 Process Temperature, Nominal

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 13


TMIN NUMERIC 8 Process Temperature, Minimum
VPMAX NUMERIC 8 Process Vapor Pressure, Maximum
VPNOM NUMERIC 8 Process Vapor Pressure, Nominal
VPMIN NUMERIC 8 Process Vapor Pressure, Minimum
VISMAX NUMERIC 8 Process Viscosity, Maximum
VISNOM NUMERIC 8 Process Viscosity, Nominal
VISMIN NUMERIC 8 Process Viscosity, Minimum
SGMAX NUMERIC 8 Process Specific Gravity, Maximum
SGNOM NUMERIC 8 Process Specific Gravity, Nominal
SGMIN NUMERIC 8 Process Specific Gravity, Minimum
SPLMAX NUMERIC 8 Process Noise Level, Maximum
SPLNOM NUMERIC 8 Process Noise Level, Nominal
SPLMIN NUMERIC 8 Process Noise Level, Minimum
SERVNOTE MEMO 0 Service Notes
QUNIT TEXT 8 Flow Units
P1UNIT TEXT 8 Upstream Pressure Units
TUNIT TEXT 5 Temperature Units
P2UNIT TEXT 8 Downstream Pressure Units
VPUNIT TEXT 8 Vapor Pressure Units
VISUNIT TEXT 8 Viscosity Units
SGUNIT TEXT 8 Specific Gravity Units
SPLUNIT TEXT 8 Sound Pressure Level Units
SERVDESC TEXT 8 Service Description
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: SECLOG


Description: Secondary Standards Status Table
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
HMAX BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
RMAX BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
LMAX BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
DBMAX BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
R5 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
R2 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
R1 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
R05 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
S5 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
S2 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
S1 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
S05 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_DEAD BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_RESP BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_RISE BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_TOT BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_SET BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_OS BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_BW5 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status
SR_BW2 BOOLEAN 1 Standard Enabled Status

Table Name: SHOPMNU


Description: Default Menu File for Shop Applications - Example
Folder: MENUS

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 14


Name Type Size Description
VMFGR TEXT 15 Valve Manufacturers
VTYPE TEXT 10 Valve Tyoes
VMODEL TEXT 10 Valve Models
PCLASS NUMERIC 8 Pressure Classes
PKGTYPE TEXT 10 Packing Types
PKGMATL TEXT 10 Packing Materials
FLOWDIR TEXT 10 Flow Directions
FLOWCHAR TEXT 10 Flow Characteristics
PBALCFG TEXT 5 Pressure Balance Configurations
PBSEAL TEXT 10 Pressure Balance Seal Materials
ACTMFGR TEXT 15 Actuator Manufacturers
ACTMODEL TEXT 10 Acuator Models
SIGSOURCE TEXT 10 Signal Sources
POSITIONER TEXT 10 Positioners
BOOSTERS TEXT 10 Boosters
RISKCLASS TEXT 10 Risk Classes

Table Name: SMRTPATH


Description: SmartPath Accessed Graph File Paths Table
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


DATE DATE 8 Access Date
PATH TEXT 254 Graph File Path

Table Name: SPRINGS


Description: Catalog Table, Spring Data
Folder: CATALOG

Name Type Size Description


MFGR TEXT 15 Manufacturer
STYLE TEXT 13 Style
MODEL TEXT 15 Model
DESIGN TEXT 10 Design
RATE TEXT 6 Springrate
MAXSTROKE TEXT 6 Maximum Stroke for Spring
RATE_M TEXT 6 Metric, Springrate
MAXSTROK_M TEXT 6 Metric, Maximum Stroke for Spring
SOURCE TEXT 10 Source for Data

Table Name: SRDATA


Description: Step Response Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
STEPSIZE NUMERIC 8 Step Size
HOLDTIME NUMERIC 8 System Hold Time
STROKE NUMERIC 8 Measured Valve Stroke
IDEAD NUMERIC 8 DeadTime, Incr. Signal
IRESP NUMERIC 8 Response Time, Incr. Signal
IRISE NUMERIC 8 Rise Time, Incr. Signal
ITOT NUMERIC 8 Total Time, Incr. Signal

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 15


ISET NUMERIC 8 Settling Time, Incr. Signal
IACTUAL NUMERIC 8 Actual Step, Incr. Signal
IIDEAL NUMERIC 8 Ideal Step, Incr. Signal
ISSLOPE NUMERIC 8 Slope at Steady State, Incr. Signal
ISSERR NUMERIC 8 Steady State Error, Incr. Signal
ISSPERR NUMERIC 8 Steady State Error, Percentage, Incr. Signal
ITOS NUMERIC 8 Overshoot, Incr. Signal
ITOSTIME NUMERIC 8 Overshoot, Time, Incr. Signal
IMSVEL NUMERIC 8 Midstroke Velocity, Incr. Signal
ISS TEXT 1 Steady State Determination, Decr. Signal
DDEAD NUMERIC 8 DeadTime, Decr. Signal
DRESP NUMERIC 8 Response Time, Decr. Signal
DRISE NUMERIC 8 Rise Time, Decr. Signal
DTOT NUMERIC 8 Total Time, Decr. Signal
DSET NUMERIC 8 Settling Time, Decr. Signal
DACTUAL NUMERIC 8 Actual Step, Decr. Signal
DIDEAL NUMERIC 8 Ideal Step, Decr. Signal
DSSLOPE NUMERIC 8 Slope at Steady State, Decr. Signal
DSSERR NUMERIC 8 Steady State Error, Decr. Signal
DSSPERR NUMERIC 8 Steady State Error, Percentage, Decr. Signal
DTOS NUMERIC 8 Overshoot, Decr. Signal
DTOSTIME NUMERIC 8 Overshoot, Time, Decr. Signal
DMSVEL NUMERIC 8 Midstroke Velocity, Decr. Signal
DSS TEXT 1 Steady State Determination, Decr. Signal
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Directory
COMMENT MEMO 0 Post Test Comments
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag
THRESH NUMERIC 8 Dead Time Threshold, % Nom Stroke
RISE_LOW NUMERIC 8 Rise Time, Threshold, Lower, % fs
RISE_HIGH NUMERIC 8 Rise Time, Threshold, Higher, % fs
RESPONSE NUMERIC 8 Response Time, Threshold, % fs
SETT_PP NUMERIC 8 Settling Time, Threshold, % fs
MIDPT NUMERIC 8 Midpoint, Threshold, % fs
SS_SLOPE NUMERIC 8 Steady State Slope, Threshold, %fs / sec
TOTAL NUMERIC 8 Total Time, Threshold, % fs

Table Name: STNOTES


Description: Standards Rules, Step Table Registry
Folder: STDRULES

Name Type Size Description


STEPTABLE TEXT 8 Step Table Name
DESCRIPT TEXT 40 Description
STDATE DATE 8 Date Created
REVDATE DATE 8 Date Revised
STMEMO MEMO 0 Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: STPSTD00


Description: Default Step Standard Table
Folder: STDRULES

Name Type Size Description


VALVESIZE NUMERIC 8 Valve Size
ACTSIZE NUMERIC 8 Actuator Size
STEPSIZE NUMERIC 8 Step Size
DEADTIME NUMERIC 8 Dead Time
RESPTIME NUMERIC 8 Response Time

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 16


RISETIME NUMERIC 8 Rise Time
TOTALTIME NUMERIC 8 Total Time
SETTLETIME NUMERIC 8 Settling Time
OUSHOOT NUMERIC 8 Overshoot
FREQRESP NUMERIC 8 Frequency Response Bandwidth
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: SUDATA


Description: Step Response Utility Test Data
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
STEPSIZE NUMERIC 8 Step Size
STPDIR TEXT 4 Step Direction
OFFSET NUMERIC 8 Position in Span
DURATION NUMERIC 8 Step Duration
STROKE NUMERIC 8 Measure Valve Stroke
SSSTEP NUMERIC 8 Steady State Step
IDLSTEP NUMERIC 8 Ideal Step
SSSLOPE NUMERIC 8 Steady State Slope
SSTATE BOOLEAN 1 Steady State Determination
SSERROR NUMERIC 8 Steady State Position Error
SSPERROR NUMERIC 8 Steady State Position Error, Percentage
DEADTIME NUMERIC 8 Dead Time
RESPTIME NUMERIC 8 Response Time
RISETIME NUMERIC 8 Rise Time
TOTALTIME NUMERIC 8 Total Time
SETTLING NUMERIC 8 Settling Time
TOVRSHOOT NUMERIC 8 Total Overshoot
TOSTIME NUMERIC 8 Total Overshoot Time
MSVEL NUMERIC 8 Midstroke Velocity
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Directory
COMMENT MEMO 0 Step Utility Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag
THRESH NUMERIC 8 Dead Time Threshold, % Nom Stroke
RISE_LOW NUMERIC 8 Rise Time, Threshold, Lower, % fs
RISE_HIGH NUMERIC 8 Rise Time, Threshold, Higher, % fs
RESPONSE NUMERIC 8 Response Time, Threshold, % fs
SETT_PP NUMERIC 8 Settling Time, Threshold, % fs
MIDPT NUMERIC 8 Midpoint, Threshold, % fs
SS_SLOPE NUMERIC 8 Steady State Slope, Threshold, %fs / sec
TOTAL NUMERIC 8 Total Time, Threshold, % fs

Table Name: TABLES


Description: BenchMark Data Table Summary
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TABLE TEXT 16 Table Name
CONTENTS TEXT 50 Description
FOLDER TEXT 14 Folder Location
INDEX BOOLEAN 1 Index Used
MEMO BOOLEAN 1 Memo Used

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 17


Table Name: TCONFIG
Description: Temporary Data Record
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
MFGR TEXT 15 Manufacturer
CONFIG TEXT 10 Valve Configuration
TYPE TEXT 10 Valve Type
MODEL TEXT 10 Valve Model
PCLASS NUMERIC 8 Valve Pressure Class
SIZE NUMERIC 8 Valve Size
PKGTYPE TEXT 10 Packing Type
PKGMATL TEXT 10 Packing Material
FLOWDIR TEXT 10 Flow Direction
SPECFRICT NUMERIC 8 Manufacturer Specified Friction
CFGNOTE MEMO 0 Configuration Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: TEMPVID


Description: Temporary Data Record
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
COMPANY TEXT 25 Company Name
PLANT TEXT 25 Plant Name
UNIT TEXT 25 Unit Name
LOCATION TEXT 25 Location
PIDDWG TEXT 10 Process Instrumentation Drawing Number
DESCRIPT TEXT 15 Description
INSERVICE TEXT 4 Date Placed In Service
RISKCLASS TEXT 10 Risk Classification
COMMENT MEMO 0 Identification Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: TESTSEQ


Description: Test Counter
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TESTTYPE TEXT 15 Test Type
SYM TEXT 1 Symbol for Test
THISYR NUMERIC 8 Total This Year
PREVYR NUMERIC 8 Total Previous Year
TOTAL NUMERIC 8 Total Tests To Date
LASTTEST DATE 8 Date of Last Test
BY TEXT 25 Test Operator

Table Name: THISTORY


Description: Summary of Testing, Current Path
Folder: RECORDS

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 18


Name Type Size Description
TNUMBER TEXT 8 Test Number
TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
TTYPE TEXT 10 Test Type
TDATE DATE 8 Test Date
TTIME TEXT 5 Test Time
TTECH TEXT 25 Test Operator
DATADIR TEXT 75 Data Storage Directory
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: TMPADSYS


Description: Temporary Data Record
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


CHANNEL TEXT 1 A/D Channel
TRANSDUCER TEXT 25 Parameter Measured
COLORCODE TEXT 17 Color Code
INTERFACE TEXT 10 Interface Connect Label
RANGE NUMERIC 8 Transducer Range
RANGEUNIT TEXT 4 Transducer Range Units
BDSERIAL TEXT 8 BDE Assigned Serial Number
SCALEFACT NUMERIC 14 Transducer Scalefactor
CALDATE DATE 8 Date Last Calibrated
INTERVAL NUMERIC 2 Recommended Interval Between Calibration, Months
REMOTE BOOLEAN 1 Remote Table Flag

Table Name: TMPOWNER


Description: Temporary Data Record
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


OWNER TEXT 35 Licensed Owner
SYSDESG TEXT 2 System Designation
SERIALNUM TEXT 15 System Serial Number
LOCATION TEXT 25 Location
PHONE TEXT 20 Phone Number
FAX TEXT 20 Fax Number
CALDATE DATE 8 System Calibration Date
COMPANY TEXT 50 Company Name, Report Cover Sheet
ADDRESS TEXT 50 Address, Report Cover Sheet
CITY TEXT 50 City, Report Cover Sheet
STATE TEXT 25 State, Report Cover Sheet
COUNTRY TEXT 50 Country, Report Cover Sheet
ZIPCODE TEXT 12 Zipcode, Report Cover Sheet
WEBSITE TEXT 50 Website URL, Report Cover Sheet
OPERATOR TEXT 50 BenchMark Operator, Test Log
INSTALLED DATE 8 Installation Date of BenchMark Software

Table Name: TPOS


Description: Temporary Data Record
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 19


ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
ACTMFGR TEXT 15 Actuator Manufacturer
STYLE TEXT 13 Actuator Style
MODEL TEXT 10 Actuator Model
AREATOP NUMERIC 8 Area Top
AREABOT NUMERIC 8 Area Bottom
NOMSTROKE NUMERIC 8 Nominal Stroke
AIRACT TEXT 3 Air Action
FAILMODE TEXT 8 Fail Mode
POSITIONER TEXT 10 Positioner Model
CAMPROFILE TEXT 10 Positioner Cam Profile
SIGSOURCE TEXT 10 Signal Source
SIGRANGE TEXT 24 Signal Range
IPNOMMIN NUMERIC 8 I/P Nominal, Minimum
IPNOMMAX NUMERIC 8 I/P Nominal, Maximum
MINBSET NUMERIC 8 Benchset, Minimum
MAXBSET NUMERIC 8 Benchset, Maximum
SPRGRATE NUMERIC 8 Springrate
MINAIRP NUMERIC 8 Air Pressure, Minimum
BOOSTERS TEXT 10 Booster Configuration
POSNOTE MEMO 0 Positioning System Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: TRANSCAL


Description: BenchMark Transducer Calibration
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TRANCOLOR TEXT 17 Transducer Color Code
TRANSDUCER TEXT 15 Transducer
RANGE NUMERIC 8 Transducer Range
UNITS TEXT 4 Transducer Range Units
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Transducer Manufacturer Serial Number
BDSERIAL TEXT 8 BDE Serial Number
SCALEFACT NUMERIC 8 Scalefactor, Eng. Units / Volt
HYST NUMERIC 8 Transducer Hysteresis
LINEAR NUMERIC 8 Transducer Linearity
CALBY TEXT 10 Calibration By
STANDARD TEXT 10 Calibration Standard Used
CALDATE TEXT 10 Calibration Date
CALPERIOD NUMERIC 8 Calibration Period

Table Name: TTRIM


Description: Temporary Data Record
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
SEATDIA NUMERIC 8 Seat Diameter
TRIMALPHA TEXT 1 Seat Diameter, Alpha Designation
CVRATED NUMERIC 8 Flow Coefficient
CHAR TEXT 10 Flow Characteristic
PBCFG TEXT 5 Pressure Balance Configuration
PBAREA NUMERIC 8 Pressure Balance Area
STEMDIA NUMERIC 8 Stem Diameter
PBSEAL TEXT 10 Pressure Balance Seal

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 20


TRIMNOTE MEMO 0 Trim Notes
EFFARM NUMERIC 8 Effective Moment Arm, Rotary Transmission
SPECTORQ NUMERIC 8 Specified Torque
SEATLEAK TEXT 10 Seat Leak Classification
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: UNITAB


Description: Units Table
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


SUNIT TEXT 10 Signal Unit
LUNIT TEXT 10 Length Unit
AUNIT TEXT 10 Area Unit
PUNIT TEXT 10 Pressure Unit
FUNIT TEXT 10 Force Unit
TUNIT TEXT 10 Torque Unit
DUNIT TEXT 10 Distance Unit (alt)
SLUNIT TEXT 10 Seat Load Unit
SRUNIT TEXT 10 Springrate Unit
TIMEUNIT TEXT 10 Time Unit
PEUNIT TEXT 10 Percent Error Unit
NEUNIT TEXT 10 Nominal Error Unit
PSEUNIT TEXT 10 Percent Step Error Unit
VELUNIT TEXT 10 Velocity Unit
SVELUNIT TEXT 10 Step Velocity Unit

Table Name: UNITREF


Description: Units Reference Table
Folder: SYSTEM

Name Type Size Description


SUNIT TEXT 10 Signal Unit
SMUNIT TEXT 10 Signal Unit, Metric
SFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Signal Unit, Conversion Factor
LUNIT TEXT 10 Length Unit
LMUNIT TEXT 10 Length Unit, Metric
LFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Length Unit, Conversion Factor
RUNIT TEXT 10 Rotary Unit
RMUNIT TEXT 10 Rotary Unit, Metric
RFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Rotary Unit, Conversion Factor
AUNIT TEXT 10 Area Unit
AMUNIT TEXT 10 Area Unit, Metric
AFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Area Unit, Conversion Factor
PUNIT TEXT 10 Pressure Unit
PMUNIT TEXT 10 Pressure Unit, Metric
PFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Pressure Unit, Conversion Factor
FUNIT TEXT 10 Force Unit
FMUNIT TEXT 10 Force Unit, Metric
FFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Force Unit, Conversion Factor
TUNIT TEXT 10 Torque Unit
TMUNIT TEXT 10 Torque Unit, Metric
TFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Torque Unit, Conversion Factor
DUNIT TEXT 10 Distance Unit (alt)
DMUNIT TEXT 10 Distance Unit (alt), Metric
DFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Distance Unit (alt), Conversion Factor
SLUNIT TEXT 10 Seat Load Unit
SLMUNIT TEXT 10 Seat Load Unit, Metric

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 21


SLFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Seat Load Unit, Conversion Factor
SRUNIT TEXT 10 Springrate Unit
SRMUNIT TEXT 10 Springrate, Metric
SRFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Springrate Unit, Conversion Factor
TIMEUNIT TEXT 10 Time Unit
TIMEMUNI TEXT 10 Time Unit, Metric
TIMEFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Time Unit, Conversion Factor
PEUNIT TEXT 10 Percent Error Unit
PEMUNIT TEXT 10 Percent Error Unit, Metric
PEFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Percent Error Unit, Conversion Factor
NEUNIT TEXT 10 Nominal Error Unit
NEMUNIT TEXT 10 Nominal Error Unit, Metric
NEMFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Nominal Error Unit, Conversion Factor
PSEUNIT TEXT 10 Percent Step Error Unit
PSEMUNIT TEXT 10 Percent Step Error Unit, Metric
PSEFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Percent Step Error Unit, Conversion Factor
VELUNIT TEXT 10 Velocity Unit
VELMUNIT TEXT 10 Velocity Unit, Metric
VELFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Velocity Unit, Conversion Factor
SVELUNIT TEXT 10 Step Velocity Unit
SVELMUNIT TEXT 10 Step Velocity Unit, Metric
SVELFACTOR NUMERIC 15 Step Velocity Unit, Conversion Factor

Table Name: VCONFIG


Description: Valve Configuration Information
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
MFGR TEXT 15 Manufacturer
CONFIG TEXT 10 Valve Configuration
TYPE TEXT 10 Valve Type
MODEL TEXT 10 Valve Model
PCLASS NUMERIC 8 Valve Pressure Class
SIZE NUMERIC 8 Valve Size
PKGTYPE TEXT 10 Packing Type
PKGMATL TEXT 10 Packing Material
FLOWDIR TEXT 10 Flow Direction
SPECFRICT NUMERIC 8 Manufacturer Specified Friction
CFGNOTE MEMO 0 Configuration Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: VID


Description: Valve Identification Information
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
COMPANY TEXT 25 Company Name
PLANT TEXT 25 Plant Name
UNIT TEXT 25 Unit Name
LOCATION TEXT 25 Location
PIDDWG TEXT 10 Process Instrumentation Drawing Number
DESCRIPT TEXT 15 Description

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 22


INSERVICE TEXT 4 Date Placed In Service
RISKCLASS TEXT 10 Risk Classification
COMMENT MEMO 0 Identification Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: VPOS


Description: Valve Positioning System Information
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
ACTMFGR TEXT 15 Actuator Manufacturer
STYLE TEXT 13 Actuator Style
MODEL TEXT 10 Actuator Model
AREATOP NUMERIC 8 Area Top
AREABOT NUMERIC 8 Area Bottom
NOMSTROKE NUMERIC 8 Nominal Stroke
AIRACT TEXT 3 Air Action
FAILMODE TEXT 8 Fail Mode
POSITIONER TEXT 10 Positioner Model
CAMPROFILE TEXT 10 Positioner Cam Profile
SIGSOURCE TEXT 10 Signal Source
SIGRANGE TEXT 24 Signal Range
IPNOMMIN NUMERIC 8 I/P Nominal, Minimum
IPNOMMAX NUMERIC 8 I/P Nominal, Maximum
MINBSET NUMERIC 8 Benchset, Minimum
MAXBSET NUMERIC 8 Benchset, Maximum
SPRGRATE NUMERIC 8 Springrate
MINAIRP NUMERIC 8 Air Pressure, Minimum
BOOSTERS TEXT 10 Booster Configuration
POSNOTE MEMO 0 Positioning System Notes
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

Table Name: VTRIM


Description: Valve Trim Information
Folder: RECORDS

Name Type Size Description


TAGNUM TEXT 15 Tag Number
MFGSERIAL TEXT 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALTSERIAL TEXT 15 Alternative Serial Number
SEATDIA NUMERIC 8 Seat Diameter
TRIMALPHA TEXT 1 Seat Diameter, Alpha Designation
CVRATED NUMERIC 8 Flow Coefficient
CHAR TEXT 10 Flow Characteristic
PBCFG TEXT 5 Pressure Balance Configuration
PBAREA NUMERIC 8 Pressure Balance Area
STEMDIA NUMERIC 8 Stem Diameter
PBSEAL TEXT 10 Pressure Balance Seal
TRIMNOTE MEMO 0 Trim Notes
EFFARM NUMERIC 8 Effective Moment Arm, Rotary Transmission
SPECTORQ NUMERIC 8 Specified Torque
SEATLEAK TEXT 10 Seat Leak Classification
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page B- 23


C
Custom Configuration Menus

Page
Overview C-1
Data Table Based Menus C-1
Appendix C
Custom Configuration Menus

Overview
The drop boxes menus contained in the “Valve Configuration” data entry window can be
customized to assist in the rapid identification of valves in your facility. Menu list items are
sourced from files containing BenchMark data tables (dbf).

Data Table Based Menus


FILE FORMAT MUST BE MAINTAINED OR ERRORS WILL RESULT IN THE APPLICATION.
As described in Chapter 16, Configure System, browse to select the desired file to use as a source
for the Configuration function drop-down menus. Any number of these data table based menu
files can exist on a system. However, BenchMark 5.0 will use the file registered in the “Data Entry
Menu File” field shown in the System Configuration function. Menu list contents can be
customized using the BenchMark 5.0 Database Tools function, a PC spreadsheet or PC database
program. If editing with an external application, always save the menu file in a dBase IV or later
format (DBF).

The following discussion refers to the example menu data table: SHOPMNU.DBF shown in figure
C-1.

This table is being edited using a PC database program. Enter the desired entries in UPPER CASE
in the columns under the respective list box as indicated by the column heading. List the menu
items in the order that they are to be displayed. BenchMark 5.0 will NOT sort them. There is no
practical limit to the number of items that can be entered. It is recommended that the lists be
kept brief and that several product or vendor focused files be made.

It is not necessary to have the same number of items in each column. Blanks can be entered and
will not be displayed in the BenchMark 5.0 menu list.

Do not change the field width or type.

Figure: C-1
Menu Table
Example

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page C-1


D
Pass / Fail Annotation

Page
Pass / Fail Annotation D-1
Appendix D
Pass / Fail Annotation

Pass / Fail Annotation


This discussion presumes that the Pass / Fail comparisons are enabled. Please review Chapter 16,
Configure System for more details on enabling this function.
During presentation of Baseline Test Results, BenchMark 5.0 compares each result to
corresponding Comparative Performance Standard (or range of standards), if enabled. If the pass /
fail comparison calculation determines a FAIL, the error is calculated in percent, a qualifying
comment is presented and the result row highlighted. BenchMark 5.0 uses the contents of the
PFCOM table to determine the qualifying comment and corresponding row highlight color.
PFCOM.DBF is located on the Standards Rules Path. The default path for this file is
\BMARK_V\DEFAULT\STDRULES. When a Standards Rules Path is created using the Auto Create
(Chapter 5, Locate Record ) function of BenchMark 5.0, this default PFCOM table will be copied
to the newly created path. Therefore the contents of the table on the DEFAULT path are in fact
the default Pass / Fail comments.
The structure of the PFCOM.DBF table is as follows:
Field Name Type Size Description
PARAMETER String 12 Applicable Test Parameter
LOW Numeric 10 Range Minimum, percent, exclusive
HIGH Numeric 10 Range Maximum, percent, inclusive
COMMENT String 30 Comment on Failure
COLOR String 10 Highlight Color on Failure

Each row in the table represents a range of percent error. The low value is exclusive and the high
value is inclusive. Consider the following table as an example.

Figure D.1
PFCOM
Contents
Example

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page D-1


Appendix D
Pass / Fail Annotation

Pass / Fail Annotation (continued)


Consider the example of Figure D.1 on the previous page.
The first row indicates that for errors in the range of greater than zero to and including 10 percent, the
qualifying comment will read “Minor Error” and the highlight color will be YELLOW. Similarly, when
errors exceed 50 percent and are less than or equal to 100 percent, the qualifying comment will be
“Serious Error” and the highlight color will be RED.
The PARAMETER field is used to identify the applicable test parameter. Other parameter entries need
only identify exceptions; although technically, a series of entries could be made for all Baseline test
parameters. A minimum of one DEFAULT parameter record is required. In the example shown in
Figure D-1, the Average Friction (AVGFRICT) results would be compared to the specific records
containing the Parameter entry AVGFRICT; all other parameters would be compared to the records
containing the Parameter entry DEFAULT. The Parameter entry must match the corresponding field in
the BLDATA.DBF file. See Appendix B, Summary of Data Tables of list of fields.
This table is in dBase IV™ format and must remain so for the program to function properly. It
may be edited and modified with BenchMark 5.0 Database Tools or with most PC spreadsheet or
database applications.
As many as 32,000 rows can be handled by this table, therefore there is essentially no limit on
the sensitivity of this table. If there are no records in the table, no comments will be generated.
The following colors are acceptable entries:
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
MAGENTA
CYAN
WHITE
GRAY

Obviously certain colors will work better than others as highlight colors. Bear in mind that the text
of the row is black.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page D-2


E
Default Standards Calculation

Page
Default Standards Calculation E-1
Appendix E
Default Standards Calculation

Default Standards Calculation


After a BenchMark 5.0 valve record is entered, a set of Default Performance Standards is calculated
for the valve. These Performance Standards can subsequently be modified or disabled to suit the
needs of the particular valve. This procedure is followed for all entered records regardless of the state
of the Pass / Fail selection (Chapter 16, Configure System).
Prior to calculating the Default Performance Standards, BenchMark 5.0 examines the state of the Set
Default Standards by selection (Chapter 16, Configure System). If Defaults is selected the DFCALC
table on the current Standard Rules Path is the source for the Calculation Specification. Similarly, if Customer is
selected the CUSTEXP table is the source, or if Valve Configuration is selected the CFGEXP table is the source.

Customer Selection:
The structure of the CUSTEXP.DBF table is as follows:
Field Name Type Size Description
COMPANY String 25 Company Name
PLANT String 25 Plant Name
UNIT String 25 Unit Name
LSPEC String 4 Linear Specification
RSPEC String 4 Rotary Specification
M Boolean 1 System Units Flag

An example of a CUSTEXP.DBF table is shown in Figure E-1 below.

Figure E.1
Example
CUSTEXP
Table

BenchMark 5.0 examines this table beginning with the last record in natural order. A comparison
is made between the Identification fields of the Current Valve Record and the corresponding
fields in each CUSTEXP record. Fields in the CUSTEXP table are presumed to be linked by a
logical ‘AND’ and therefore all fields must match in order to have a record match. Fields
containing a “$” symbol are not compared. When a match is found, either LSPEC or RSPEC will
be invoked as the Specification depending on whether the valve is Linear or Rotary, respectively.
In the example of Figure E.1, for the last record (3) to be selected and the corresponding LSPEC
‘0010’ or RSPEC ‘0001’ invoked, the current COMPANY must be “CHARLIE POWER” and the
current UNIT must be “STEAM”. PLANT, since is contains a “$”, is not considered. Valve records
from all other UNITS of “CHARLIE POWER” will use the default standards (LSPEC 0000 and RSPEC
0001) since no record match will occur with any of the current table entries.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page E-1


Appendix E
Default Standards Calculation

Default Standards Calculation (continued)


Valve Configuration Selection:
The structure of the CFGEXP.DBF table is as follows:
Field Name Type Size Description
VCONFIG String 11 Valve Basic Configuration: Linear / Rotary
VMFGR String 16 Valve Manufacturer
VTYPE String 11 Valve Type
VMODEL String 11 Valve Model
PKGTYPE String 10 Packing Type
STEMDIA String 10 Stem Diameter
PBCFG String 6 Pressure Balance Configuration
ACTSTYLE String 14 Actuator Style
ACTMFGR String 16 Actuator Manufacturer
ACTMODEL String 11 Actuator Model
POSITIONER String 11 Positioner
CAMPROFILE String 11 Positioner Cam Profile
STDSPEC String 4 Standard Specification Number
M Boolean 1 System Units Flag

An example of a CFGEXP.DBF table is shown in Figure E-2 below.

Figure E.2
Example
CFGEXP
Table

BenchMark 5.0 examines this table beginning with the last record in natural order. A comparison
is made between the Configuration, Trim and Positioning System fields of the Current Valve
Record and the corresponding fields in each CFGEXP record. Fields in the CFGTEXP table are
presumed to be linked by a logical ‘AND’ and therefore all fields must match to create a record
match. Fields containing a “$” symbol are not compared. When a match is found, STDSPEC will
be invoked as the Specification.
Consider the example of Figure E.2. For the last record to be selected and the corresponding
Specification STDSPEC ‘0006’ invoked, the current Valve Configuration must be “LINEAR”, current
Valve Manufacturer must be “ACME” and current Actuator Manufacturer must be “CHARLIE”. Other
fields containing a “$”, are not considered. All valves entered with this configuration will have Default
Performance Standards calculated in accordance with STDSPEC ‘0006’. Other valve configurations
will not match this CFGEXP record; therefore, BenchMark will continue to move through the table
until a match is found. Note: either the first or second record, with only comparison to Valve
Configuration, will be invoked if no other matches are found. These are the default Specifications and
must be present for the BenchMark 5.0 program to run properly.
In this example, all LINEAR valves, manufactured by ACME, without CHARLIE actuators will match
record 3, and have Default Performance Standards calculated in accordance with STDSPEC ‘0005’.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page E-2


Appendix E
Default Standards Calculation

Default Standards Calculation (continued)


By either of the two previously discussed methods or if Defaults is the selection choice, a
Specification will be invoked to guide the calculation of a set of Default Performance Standards.
BenchMark 5.0 then opens the DFCALC table, located on the current Standards Rules Path, and
moves to the record matching the Specification. Fields from that record are used in the
calculations. The structure of the DFCALC.DBF table is as follows:
Name Type Size Description
SPECNUM TEXT 6 Specification Number
STEPTABLE TEXT 8 Step Table Link
TRANGE1 NUMERIC 10 Travel Range Limit, Lower
TRANGE2 NUMERIC 10 Travel Range Limit, Upper
TRAVMAX1 NUMERIC 10 Travel Tolerance, Max, Range 1
TRAVMIN1 NUMERIC 10 Travel Tolerance, Min, Range 1
TRAVMAX2 NUMERIC 10 Travel Tolerance, Max, Range 2
TRAVMIN2 NUMERIC 10 Travel Tolerance, Min, Range 2
TRAVMAX3 NUMERIC 10 Travel Tolerance, Max, Range 3
TRAVMIN3 NUMERIC 10 Travel Tolerance, Min, Range 3
SIGP NUMERIC 8 Current Signal Factor, Percent of Span
Q BOOLEAN 1 Nominal or Max Travel Switch
HDLAG DOUBLE 8 HD+LAG Error Maximum, Overall
OVRLIN DOUBLE 8 Linearity Error Maximum, Overall
FTOL DOUBLE 8 Friction Tolerance, Percent
ASDRP DOUBLE 8 Air Supply Droop, Maximum
BSTOL DOUBLE 8 Benchset Pressure Tolerance
SRTOL DOUBLE 8 Springrate Tolerance
SLVSIZE DOUBLE 8 Valve Size Limit, Seat Leak Class Range
CL1SLA DOUBLE 8 Class I, SeatLoad, Range A
CL1SLB DOUBLE 8 Class I, SeatLoad, Range B
CL2SLA DOUBLE 8 Class II, SeatLoad, Range A
CL2SLB DOUBLE 8 Class II, SeatLoad, Range B
CL3SLA DOUBLE 8 Class III, SeatLoad, Range A
CL3SLB DOUBLE 8 Class III, SeatLoad, Range B
CL4SLA DOUBLE 8 Class IV, SeatLoad, Range A
CL4SLB DOUBLE 8 Class IV, SeatLoad, Range B
CL5SLA DOUBLE 8 Class V, SeatLoad, Range A
CL5SLB DOUBLE 8 Class V, SeatLoad, Range B
CL6SLA DOUBLE 8 Class VI, SeatLoad, Range A
CL6SLB DOUBLE 8 Class VI, SeatLoad, Range B
POSSIG DOUBLE 8 Pressure Signal Factor, Percent of Span
PHDLAG DOUBLE 8 HD+LAG Error Maximum, Positioner
POSLIN DOUBLE 8 Linearity Error Maximum, Positioner
BALPRES DOUBLE 8 Positioner Balance Pressure, Minimum
IPMAXTOL DOUBLE 8 I/P Output Pressure, Maximum, Tolerance
IPMINTOL DOUBLE 8 I/P Output Pressure, Minimum, Tolerance
IPHDL DOUBLE 8 HD+LAG Error Maximum, I/P Transducer
IPLIN DOUBLE 8 Linearity Error Maximum, IP Transducer
RESFACT5 DOUBLE 8 Resolution Step Error, Maximum, 5% Step
RESFACT2 DOUBLE 8 Resolution Step Error, Maximum, 2% Step
RESFACT1 DOUBLE 8 Resolution Step Error, Maximum, 1% Step
RESFACT05 DOUBLE 8 Resolution Step Error, Maximum, 0.5% Step
SENFACT5 DOUBLE 8 Sensitivity Step Error, Maximum, 5% Step
SENFACT2 DOUBLE 8 Sensitivity Step Error, Maximum, 2% Step
SENFACT1 DOUBLE 8 Sensitivity Step Error, Maximum, 1% Step
SENFACT05 DOUBLE 8 Sensitivity Step Error, Maximum, 0.5% Step
TORQTOL DOUBLE 8 Friction Tolerance, Percent
HMAXERR DOUBLE 8 Hysteresis Error, Maximum
RMAXERR DOUBLE 8 Repeatability Error, Maximum
LMAXERR DOUBLE 8 Linearity Error, Maximum
DBMAXERR DOUBLE 8 Deadband Error, Maximum
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page E-3


Appendix E
Default Standards Calculation

Default Standards Calculation (continued)


The following two records are the Default Specifications and must be contained in the DFCALC
table for the BenchMark 4.0 system to work properly. They may be edited for content, but they
must not be deleted.
The Default LINEAR Specification designated ‘0000’:

Figure E.3
Example
Linear
Specification

The Default ROTARY Specification designated ‘0001’:

Figure E.4
Example
Rotary
Specification

There is no practical limit to the number of Specifications that can be entered to this table and
registered in the CUSTEXP and CFGEXP tables. It is recommended that existing tables be backed
up prior to additions or modification to these tables.
Note that each specification record links to a Standard Step Table.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page E-4


Appendix E
Default Standards Calculation

Default Standards Calculation (continued)


The following is the Standard Step Table format:

Table Name: STPSTD00


Description: Default Step Standard Table
Folder: STDRULES
Name Type Size Description
VALVESIZE NUMERIC 8 Valve Size
ACTSIZE NUMERIC 8 Actuator Size
STEPSIZE NUMERIC 8 Step Size
DEADTIME NUMERIC 8 Dead Time
RESPTIME NUMERIC 8 Response Time
RISETIME NUMERIC 8 Rise Time
TOTALTIME NUMERIC 8 Total Time
SETTLETIME NUMERIC 8 Settling Time
OUSHOOT NUMERIC 8 Overshoot
FREQRESP DOUBLE 8 Frequency Response Bandwidth
M BOOLEAN 1 Unit Flag

STPSTD00 is the default Step Standard Table and must be present on the system for the
BenchMark 5.0 system to operate properly.

During the calculation of Default Performance Standard, BenchMark 5.0 searches the Step Standard
Table specified in the Standard Specification for dynamic parameters related to the step and
frequency response of the valve.
BenchMark 5.0 evaluates the table based on the Valve Size, Actuator Size and Step Size to determine
the appropriate parameters.
There is no practical limit on the number of Step Standard Tables that may be created. It is strongly
recommended that all files be backed up prior to the modification or editing any table.
Black Diamond Engineering has available a software tool, BenchMark Standards MGR™ that can assist
you in the development and management of these tables. Contact Black Diamond Engineering to
receive more information on this product.

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page E-5


Appendix E
Default Standards Calculation

Default Standards Calculation (continued)


Example of a Step Standard Table:

Figure E.5
Example
Standard
Step Table

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page E-6


F
Task File Format

Page
Task File Format F-1
Appendix F
Task File Format

Task File Format


The current Record Path folder “Inbox” is
examined for files containing the suffix “.tsk”.
Each such Task file located in this path is opened
and registered to a temporary table displayed to
the operator. Tagnumber, Manufacturers Serial
Number, Alternate Serial Number, Work Order
Number, Issue Date and Instructions are
displayed. The operator may then select a valve
Figure F.1 to be tested. If the valve record already exists in
Task File the BenchMark 5.0 tables on the current Record
Location Path, the record will be selected and, by
Example operator confirmation, made the current record.
If the record does not exist, BenchMark 5.0 will
attempt to load Valve Identification,
Configuration, Trim and Positioning System fields from the Task List Table. After operator
confirmation of entries, the Task files can be disabled by converting them to a “.dne” (done)
suffix.
You do not have to use Task files to productively operate the BenchMark 5.0 system. This feature has
been included to provide convenient import linkage to other software programs. BenchMark 5.0
does not produce Task files. They must be produced by owner supplied asset manager or other
business management system.
Basic File Format: The “.tsk” files are in the format of the standard Windows™ Private Profile file
format. This format is also commonly referred to as ‘INI’ format.
File Structure: BenchMark 5.0 will input values from the following groups and key names. As
with any profile or INI file key names and headings need to be exact.
File Structure Size Description
[HEADING] Group Heading
FILENAME= 75 Task Filename and Path
FILE CREATED= Valid Date File Creation Date
UNITS= 2 File Units: US or SI
[WORK_ORDER] Group Heading
WORK_ORDER_NUM= 15 Work Order Designation
ISSUE_DATE= Valid Date Work Order Issue Date
INSTRUCTIONS= 256 Work Instructions

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page F-1


Appendix F
Task File Format

Task File Format (continued)


File Structure Size Dec Description
[IDENTIFICATION]
TAGNUMBER= 15 Valve Tag Designation
MFG SERIAL #= 15 Manufacturers Serial Number
ALT SERIAL #= 15 Alternate Serial Number
UNIT= 25 Plant Unit Name or Designation
COMPANY= 25 Company Name
FACILITY= 25 Facility or Plant Name
LOCATION= 25 Facility or Plant Location
P/I DRAWING= 10 Process Instrument Drawing Desig.
APPLICATION= 15 Valve Application
YR INSTALLED= 4 Year Installed
RISK CLASS=HIGH 10 Valve Risk Classification
[CONFIGURATION]
CONFIGURATION= 10 Configuration: Linear or Rotary
MANUFACTURER= 15 Valve Manufacturer
VALVE TYPE= 10 Valve Type
VALVE MODEL= 10 Valve Model Number
PRESSURE CLASS= 6 Valve Pressure Class Rating
FLOW DIRECTION= 10 Flow Direction
PACKING TYPE= 10 Type of Packing
PACKING MATERIAL 10 Packing Material
BODY SIZE= 12 4 Valve Size
BODY SIZE UNIT= in, mm, reference
STEM DIAMETER= 12 4 Valve Stem Diameter
STEM DIAMETER UNIT= in, mm, reference
ESTIMATE FRICTION= 12 4 Estimate of Friction
ESTIMATE FRICTION UNIT= lbf, N, reference
EFF MOMENT ARM= 12 4 Effective Moment Arm (rotary)
EFF MOMENT ARM UNIT= in, mm, reference
ESTIMATE PKG TORQUE= 12 4 Estimate of Torque
ESTIMATE PKG TORQUE UNIT= in-lbf, N-m, reference
[TRIM/SEAT]
SEAT ALPHA= 1 Seat Diameter Alpha Character
FLOW CHARACTERISTIC= 10 Flow Characteristic
SEAT LEAK CLASS= 10 Seat Leak Class, ANSI Designation
BAL / UNBAL= 5 Pressure Balanced or Unbalanced Trim
PBAL SEAL MATERIAL= 10 Pressure Balance Seal Material
SEAT DIAMETER= 12 4 Seat Diameter
SEAT DIAMETER UNIT= in, mm, reference
RATED CV= 12 4 Flow Coefficient, Rated
RATED CV UNIT= dimensionless, reference
UNBALANCED AREA= 12 4 Unbalanced Area
UNBALANCED AREA UNIT= in2, mm2, reference

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page F-2


Appendix F
Task File Format

Task File Format (continued)


File Structure Size Dec Description
[ACTUATOR/POSITIONER] Group Heading
ACTUATOR STYLE= 13 Single or Double Acting
MANUFACTURER= 15 Actuator Manufacturer
MODEL= 10 Actuator Model
AIR ACTION= 3 Air Action: ATO or ATC
FAIL MODE= 8 Fail Mode: Open, Close, In-Place
SIGNAL RANGE= 24 Signal Range: e.g. 4-20 mA, 3-15 psig
SIGNAL SOURCE= 10 Signal Source, Smart, P/P or I/P
POSITIONER= 10 Positioner Model
CAM PROFILE= 10 Cam Profile, Linear, Equal %, Quick Open
BOOSTERS / QE= 10 Booster or Quick Exhaust Config
EFFECTIVE AREA= 12 4 Actuator Effective Area, (top area)
EFFECTIVE AREA UNIT= in2, mm2, reference
BOTTOM AREA= 12 4 Bottom Area, Double Acting Actuator
BOTTOM AREA UNIT= in2, mm2, reference
NOMINAL STROKE= 12 4 Nominal Valve Stroke
NOMINAL STROKE UNIT= in, mm, reference
SPRINGRATE= 12 4 Springrate
SPRINGRATE UNIT= lbf/in, N/mm, reference
BENCHSET MIN= 12 4 Benchset, Minimum Pressure
BENCHSET MAX= 12 4 Benchset, Maximum Pressure
BENCHSET UNIT= psig, kPa, reference
I/P NOM RANGE MIN= 12 4 I/P Nominal Minimum Pressure
I/P NOM RANGE MAX= 12 4 I/P Nominal Maximum Pressure
I/P NOM RANGE UNIT= psig, kPa, reference
MIN AIR PRESS= 12 4 Minimum Air Pressure
MIN AIR PRESS UNIT psig, kPa, reference

BenchMark User’s Guide, Version 5.0 Page F-3

Potrebbero piacerti anche